Operating Guide

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Wall-mounted and Standalone

drives.danfoss.com
VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Contents

Contents
1 Introduction 10
1.1 Purpose of this Operating Guide 10

1.2 Additional Resources 10

1.3 Disposal 10

1.4 Type Approvals and Certifications 10

1.5 Start-up Quick Guide 11

2 Safety 12
2.1 Safety Symbols 12

2.2 Danger and Warnings 12

2.3 Cautions and Notices 13

3 Product Overview 16
3.1 Intended Use 16

3.2 Manual Version 16

3.3 Package Label 16

3.4 Description of the Type Code 17

3.5 Enclosure Sizes 19

3.6 Available Protection Ratings 22

3.7 Available EMC Classes 22

3.8 Control Panel 24

3.8.1 Introduction to Control Panel 24

3.8.2 Keypad 24

3.8.3 Display 26

3.8.4 Basic Menu Structure 27

4 Receiving the Delivery 28

4.1 Checking the Delivery 28

4.1.1 Accessories for FR4/FI4–FR6/FI6 28

4.1.2 Accessories for FR7/FI7–FR8/FI8 29

4.1.3 Accessories for FR10–FR11 Standalone 29

4.2 Storing the Product 29

4.3 Lifting the Product 30

4.4 Using the Product Modified Label 31

5 Mounting the Unit 32

5.1 Environmental Requirements 32

5.1.1 General Environmental Requirements 32

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910 | 3

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Contents

5.1.2 High Altitude Installation 32

5.2 Cooling Requirements 33

5.2.1 General Cooling Requirements 33

5.2.2 Cooling of FR4 to FR9 33

5.2.3 Cooling of Standalone AC drives (FR10 to FR11) 35

5.3 Installation Sequence 36

5.3.1 Installation Sequence for Wall-mounted AC Drives 36

5.3.2 Installation Sequence for Standalone AC Drives 37

6 Electrical Installation 38
6.1 Cable Connections 38

6.1.1 General Cable Requirements 38

6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling 38

6.1.3 Cable Selection and Dimensioning 39

6.1.4 Cable Selection and Dimensioning, North America 39

6.1.5 Fuse Selection 39

6.1.6 Principle of the Power Unit Topology 39

6.1.7 Brake Resistor Cables 40

6.2 EMC-compliant Installation 40

6.2.1 Installation in a Corner-grounded Network 41

6.3 Grounding 41

6.4 Get Access and Locate the Terminals 43

6.4.1 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR4/FI4 43

6.4.2 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR5 45

6.4.3 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR6/FI6 47

6.4.4 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR7/FI7 49

6.4.5 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR8/FI8 51

6.4.6 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR9 53

6.4.7 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR10 Standalone 55

6.4.8 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR11 Standalone 57

6.5 Installing the Cables 59

6.5.1 Additional Instructions for Cable Installation 60

6.5.2 Installing the Cables, FR4–FR6/FI4–FI6 60

6.5.3 Installing the Cables, FR7/FI7 63

6.5.4 Installing the Cables, FR8/FI8 66

6.5.5 Installing the Cables, FR9 69

6.5.6 Installing the Cables, FR10 Standalone 72

6.5.7 Installing the Cables, FR11 Standalone 76

4 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Contents

6.6 Installation in an IT System 81

6.6.1 Installing the AC drive in an IT System, FR4–FR6 81

6.6.2 Installing the AC Drive in an IT System, FR7 84

6.6.3 Installing the AC Drive in an IT System, FR8–FR11 86

7 Control Unit 87
7.1 Control Unit Components 87

7.2 Control Voltage (+24 V/EXT +24 V) 87

7.3 Control Unit Cabling 88

7.3.1 Selection of the Control Cables 88

7.3.2 Control Terminals on OPTA1 88

7.3.2.1 Digital Input Signal Inversions 90

7.3.2.2 Jumper Selections on the OPTA1 Basic Board 91

7.3.3 Control Terminals on OPTA2 and OPTA3 92

7.4 Installation of Option Boards 93

7.5 Galvanic Isolation Barriers 94

8 Using the Control Panel 95

8.1 Navigating on the Control Panel 95

8.2 Using the Monitoring Menu (M1) 95

8.2.1 Monitored Values 95

8.3 Using the Parameter Menu (M2) 97

8.3.1 Finding the Parameter 97

8.3.2 Selecting Values 98

8.3.3 Editing the Values Digit by Digit 98

8.4 Using the Keypad Control Menu 100

8.4.1 Finding the Keypad Control Menu 100

8.4.2 Keypad Control Parameters M3 100

8.4.3 Changing the Control Mode 101

8.4.4 Keypad Reference 101

8.4.4.1 Editing the Frequency Reference 101

8.4.5 Changing the Rotation Direction 101

8.4.6 Disabling the Stop Motor Function 102

8.4.7 Special Functions in Keypad Control Menu 102

8.4.7.1 Selecting the Keypad as the Control Mode 102

8.4.7.2 Copying the Frequency Reference Set to the Control Panel 102

8.5 Using the Active Faults Menu (M4) 103

8.5.1 Finding the Active Faults Menu 103

8.5.2 Examining the Fault Time Data Record 103

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910 | 5

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Contents

8.5.3 Fault Time Data Record 103

8.6 Using the Fault History Menu (M5) 104

8.6.1 Fault History Menu (M5) 104

8.6.2 Resetting the Fault History 104

8.7 Using the System Menu (M6) 105

8.7.1 Finding the System Menu 105

8.7.2 System Menu Functions 105

8.7.3 Changing the Language 108

8.7.4 Changing the Application 108

8.7.5 Copy Parameters (S6.3) 108

8.7.5.1 Saving Parameter Sets (Parameter Sets S6.3.1) 109

8.7.5.2 Uploading Parameters to Control Panel (Up To Keypad, S6.3.2) 109

8.7.5.3 Downloading Parameters to Drive (Down From Keypad, S6.3.3) 109

8.7.5.4 Activating or Deactivating the Automatic Parameter Back-up (P6.3.4) 109

8.7.5.5 Comparing the Parameters 110

8.7.6 Security 110

8.7.6.1 Finding the Security Menu 110

8.7.6.2 Passwords 111

8.7.6.3 Setting a Password 111

8.7.6.4 Entering a Password 111

8.7.6.5 Deactivating the Password Function 111

8.7.6.6 Locking a Parameter 111

8.7.6.7 Start-up Wizard (P6.5.3) 112

8.7.6.8 Activating/Deactivating the Start-up Wizard 112

8.7.6.9 Enabling/Disabling the Change of Multimonitoring Items 112

8.7.7 Keypad Settings 113

8.7.7.1 Finding the Keypad Settings Menu 113

8.7.7.2 Changing the Default Page 113

8.7.7.3 Default Page in the Operating Menu (P6.6.2) 113

8.7.7.4 Setting the Timeout Time 113

8.7.7.5 Contrast Adjustment (P6.6.4) 113

8.7.7.6 Backlight Time (P6.6.5) 114

8.7.8 Hardware Settings 114

8.7.8.1 Finding the Hardware Setting Menu 114

8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake Resistor Connection 114

8.7.8.3 Fan Control 114

8.7.8.4 Changing the Fan Control Settings 115

8.7.8.5 HMI Acknowledge Timeout (P6.7.3) 115

6 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Contents

8.7.8.6 Changing the HMI Acknowledge Timeout 115

8.7.8.7 Changing the Number of Retries to Receive HMI Acknowledgement (P6.7.4) 115

8.7.8.8 Sine Filter (P6.7.5) 115

8.7.8.9 Pre-charge Mode (P6.7.6) 116

8.7.9 System Info 116

8.7.9.1 Finding the System Info Menu 116

8.7.9.2 Total Counters (S6.8.1) 116

8.7.9.3 Trip Counters (S6.8.2) 116

8.7.9.4 Resetting the Trip Counters 116

8.7.9.5 Software (S6.8.3) 117

8.7.9.6 Applications (S6.8.4) 117

8.7.9.7 Examining the Application Page 117

8.7.9.8 Hardware (S6.8.5) 117

8.7.9.9 Checking the Status of an Option Board 118

8.7.9.10 Debug Menu (S6.8.7) 118

8.8 Using the Expander Board Menu 118

8.8.1 Expander Board Menu 118

8.8.2 Examining the Connected Option Boards 118

8.8.3 Finding the Option Board Parameters 119

8.9 Further Control Panel Functions 119

9 Commissioning 120
9.1 Safety Checks before Starting the Commissioning 120

9.2 Commissioning the AC Drive 121

9.3 Measuring the Cable and Motor Insulation 121

9.3.1 Insulation Checks of the Motor Cable 121

9.3.2 Insulation Checks of the Mains Cable 122

9.3.3 Insulation Checks of the Motor 122

9.4 Checks after Commissioning 122

9.4.1 Testing the AC Drive after Commissioning 122

9.4.2 RUN Test without Load 123

9.4.2.1 Test A: Controls from the Control Terminals 123

9.4.2.2 Test B: Control from the Keypad 123

9.4.3 Start-up Test 123

9.4.4 Identification Run 123

10 Maintenance 124
10.1 Preventive Maintenance Recommendations 124

10.2 Reforming the Capacitors 126

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910 | 7

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Contents

11 Fault Tracing 128

11.1 General Information on Fault Tracing 128

11.2 Resetting a Fault 128

11.3 Creating Service Info File 128

11.4 Error Message on Control Panel Display 129

12 Specifications 130
12.1 Weights of the AC Drive 130

12.2 Dimensions 130

12.2.1 List of Dimension Information 130

12.2.2 Wall-mounted 131

12.2.2.1 Dimensions for FR4–FR6 131

12.2.2.2 Dimensions for FR7 133

12.2.2.3 Dimensions for FR8 134

12.2.2.4 Dimensions for FR9 136

12.2.3 Flange mounting 138

12.2.3.1 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR4–FR6 138

12.2.3.2 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR7–FR8 140

12.2.3.3 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR9 142

12.2.4 Standalone 143

12.2.4.1 Dimensions for FR10–FR11 Standalone 143

12.3 Cable and Fuse Sizes 146

12.3.1 List of Cable and Fuse Size Information 146

12.3.2 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 208–240 V and 380–500 V, FR4 to FR9 146

12.3.3 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 208–240 V and 380–500 V, FR4 to FR9, North America 147

12.3.4 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V, FR6 to FR9 148

12.3.5 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), FR6 to FR9, North America 149

12.3.6 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 380–500 V, FR10 to FR11 Standalone 150

12.3.7 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 380–500 V, FR10 to FR11, North America 151

12.3.8 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V, FR10 to FR11 151

12.3.9 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), FR10 to FR11, North America 152

12.4 Cable Stripping Lengths 152

12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws 154

12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals 154

12.7 Power ratings 155

12.7.1 Overload Capability 155

12.7.2 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 208–240 V 156

12.7.3 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 208–240 V, North America 157

8 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Contents

12.7.4 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 380–500 V 158

12.7.5 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 380–500 V, North America 159

12.7.6 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V) 160

12.7.7 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), North America 162

12.8 VACON® NXP Technical Data 163

12.9 Brake Chopper Ratings 167

12.9.1 Brake Chopper Ratings 167

12.9.2 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 208–240 V 168

12.9.3 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 380–500 V 169

12.9.4 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 525–690 V 170

12.9.5 Internal Brake Resistors, FR4–FR6 (380–500 V) 171

12.10 Faults and Alarms 171

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910 | 9

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Introduction

1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of this Operating Guide
This operating guide provides information for safe installation and commissioning of the AC drive. It is intended for use by qualified
personnel. Read and follow the instructions to use the drive safely and professionally. Pay particular attention to the safety instruc-
tions and general warnings. Always keep this operating guide available with the drive.

1.2 Additional Resources

Other resources are available to understand advanced AC drive functions and programming.
• The VACON® NX manuals provide greater detail on working with parameters and show many application examples.
• The VACON® NX I/O Boards User Manual gives more information on the I/O boards and their installation.
• Instructions for operation with option boards and other optional equipment.
Supplementary publications and manuals are available from Danfoss.

NOTE! Download the English and French product manuals with applicable safety, warning and caution information from https://
www.danfoss.com/en/service-and-support/.

REMARQUE Vous pouvez télécharger les versions anglaise et française des manuels produit contenant l'ensemble des informa-
tions de sécurité, avertissements et mises en garde applicables sur le site https://www.danfoss.com/en/service-and-support/.

1.3 Disposal
Do not dispose of equipment containing electrical components together with domestic waste. Collect it separately in accordance
with local and currently valid legislation.

1.4 Type Approvals and Certifications

The following list is a selection of possible type approvals and certifications for Danfoss drives:

089

N O T I C E
The specific approvals and certification for the drive are on the nameplate of the drive. For more information, contact the local
Danfoss office or partner.

10 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Introduction

1.5 Start-up Quick Guide

Do at minimum these procedures during the installation and commissioning.
If there are problems, speak to the local distributor.
Vacon Ltd is not responsible for the use of the AC drives against the instructions.

Procedure
1. Check that the delivery agrees to the order, see 4.1 Checking the Delivery.
2. Before starting the commissioning, read carefully the safety instructions in 2.2 Danger and Warnings and 2.3 Cautions and
Notices.
3. Before the mechanical installation, check the minimum clearances around the AC drive (5.2.2 Cooling of FR4 to FR9 and
5.2.3 Cooling of Standalone AC drives (FR10 to FR11)) and check the ambient conditions in 12.8 VACON® NXP Technical
Data.
4. Check the dimensions of the motor cable, mains cable, mains fuses and check the cable connections. Read 6.1 Cable Con-
nections, 6.2 EMC-compliant Installation and 6.3 Grounding.
5. Obey the installation instructions, see 6.5 Installing the Cables.
6. Find information on the control connections in 7.3.2 Control Terminals on OPTA1.
7. If the start-up wizard is active, select the language of the control panel and the application. Accept the selections with the
[enter] button. If the start-up wizard is not active, obey the instructions a and b.
- a. Select the language of the control panel from the Menu M6, page 6.1. For instructions, see 8.7.3 Changing the Lan-
guage.
- b. Select the application from the Menu M6, page 6.2. For instructions, see 8.7.4 Changing the Application.
8. All parameters have factory default values. To make sure that the AC drive operates correctly, make sure that these group
G2.1 parameters have the same data as the nameplate. For more information on the parameters in the list, see the VACON®
All in One Application Manual.

- Nominal voltage of the motor

- Nominal frequency of the motor
- Nominal speed of the motor
- Nominal current of the motor
- Motor cos phi

9. Obey the commissioning instructions, see 9.2 Commissioning the AC Drive.

The VACON® NXS/NXP AC drive is ready for operation.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 11

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Safety

2 Safety
2.1 Safety Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual:

D A N G E R
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

W A R N I N G
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

C A U T I O N
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

N O T I C E
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related (for example, messages relating to property damage).

2.2 Danger and Warnings

D A N G E R
SHOCK HAZARD FROM POWER UNIT COMPONENTS
The power unit components are live when the drive is connected to mains. A contact with this voltage can lead to death or seri-
ous injury.
- Do not touch the components of the power unit when the drive is connected to mains. Before connecting the drive to mains,
make sure that the covers of the drive are closed.

D A N G E R
SHOCK HAZARD FROM TERMINALS
The motor terminals U, V, W, the brake resistor terminals, or the DC terminals are live when the drive is connected to mains, also
when the motor does not operate. A contact with this voltage can lead to death or serious injury.
- Do not touch the motor terminals U, V, W, the brake resistor terminals, or the DC terminals when the drive is connected to
mains. Before connecting the drive to mains, make sure that the covers of the drive are closed.

D A N G E R
SHOCK HAZARD FROM DC LINK OR EXTERNAL SOURCE
The terminal connections and the components of the drive can be live 5 minutes after the drive is disconnected from the mains
and the motor has stopped. Also the load side of the drive can generate voltage. A contact with this voltage can lead to death or
serious injury.
- Before doing electrical work on the drive:
Disconnect the drive from the mains and make sure that the motor has stopped.
Lock out and tag out the power source to the drive.
Make sure that no external source generates unintended voltage during work.
Wait 5 minutes before opening the cabinet door or the cover of the AC drive.
Use a measuring device to make sure that there is no voltage.

12 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Safety

W A R N I N G
SHOCK HAZARD FROM CONTROL TERMINALS
The control terminals can have a dangerous voltage also when the drive is disconnected from mains. A contact with this voltage
can lead to injury.
- Make sure that there is no voltage in the control terminals before touching the control terminals.

W A R N I N G
ACCIDENTAL MOTOR START
When there is a power-up, a power break, or a fault reset, the motor starts immediately if the start signal is active, unless the pulse
control for Start/Stop logic is selected. If the parameters, the applications or the software change, the I/O functions (including the
start inputs) can change. If you activate the auto reset function, the motor starts automatically after an automatic fault reset. See
the Application Guide. Failure to ensure that the motor, system, and any attached equipment are ready for start can result in
personal injury or equipment damage.
- Disconnect the motor from the drive if an accidental start can be dangerous. Make sure that the equipment is safe to operate
under any condition.

W A R N I N G
LEAKAGE CURRENT HAZARD
Leakage currents exceed 3.5 mA. Failure to ground the drive properly can result in death or serious injury.
- Ensure the correct grounding of the equipment by a certified electrical installer.

W A R N I N G
SHOCK HAZARD FROM PE CONDUCTOR
The drive can cause a DC current in the PE conductor. Failure to use a residual current-operated protective (RCD) device Type B or
a residual current-operated monitoring (RCM) device can lead to the RCD not providing the intended protection and therefore
can result in death or serious injury.
- Use a type B RCD or RCM device on the mains side of the drive.

2.3 Cautions and Notices

C A U T I O N
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM INCORRECT MEASUREMENTS
Doing measurements on the AC drive when it is connected to mains can damage the drive.
- Do not do measurements when the AC drive is connected to mains.

C A U T I O N
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM INCORRECT SPARE PARTS
Using spare parts that are not from the manufacturer can damage the drive.
- Do not use spare parts that are not from the manufacturer.

C A U T I O N
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM INSUFFICIENT GROUNDING
Not using a grounding conductor can damage the drive.
- Make sure that the AC drive is always grounded with a grounding conductor that is connected to the grounding terminal
that is identified with the PE symbol.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 13

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Safety

C A U T I O N
CUT HAZARD FROM SHARP EDGES
There can be sharp edges in the AC drive that can cause cuts.
- Wear protective gloves when mounting, cabling, or doing maintenance operations.

C A U T I O N
BURN HAZARD FROM HOT SURFACES
Touching surfaces, which are marked with the 'hot surface' sticker, can result in injury.
- Do not touch surfaces which are marked with the 'hot surface' sticker.

N O T I C E
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM STATIC VOLTAGE
Some of the electronic components inside the AC drive are sensitive to ESD. Static voltage can damage the components.
- Remember to use ESD protection always when working with electronic components of the AC drive. Do not touch the com-
ponents on the circuit boards without proper ESD protection.

N O T I C E
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM MOVEMENT
Movement after installation can damage the drive.
- Do not move the AC drive during operation. Use a fixed installation to prevent damage to the drive.

N O T I C E
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM INCORRECT EMC LEVEL
The EMC level requirements for the AC drive depend on the installation environment. An incorrect EMC level can damage the
drive.
- Before connecting the AC drive to the mains, make sure that the EMC level of the AC drive is correct for the mains.

N O T I C E
RADIO INTERFERENCE
In a residential environment, this product can cause radio interference.
- Take supplementary mitigation measures.

N O T I C E
MAINS DISCONNECTION DEVICE
If the AC drive is used as a part of a machine, the machine manufacturer must supply a mains disconnection device (refer to EN
60204-1).

N O T I C E
MALFUNCTION OF FAULT CURRENT PROTECTIVE SWITCHES
Because there are high capacitive currents in the AC drive, it is possible that the fault current protective switches do not operate
correctly.

14 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Safety

N O T I C E
VOLTAGE WITHSTAND TESTS
Doing voltage withstand tests can damage the drive.
- Do not do voltage withstand tests on the AC drive. The manufacturer has already done the tests.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 15

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

3 Product Overview
3.1 Intended Use
The drive is an electronic motor controller intended for:
• Regulation of motor speed in response to system feedback or to remote commands from external controllers. A power drive
system consists of the AC drive, the motor, and equipment driven by the motor.
• System and motor status surveillance.
The drive can also be used for motor overload protection.
VACON® NXP drive can be used as programmable logic controller (PLC) in many applications due to extensive I/O and fieldbus op-
tions and easy programmability. Custom application development can be done with VACON® Programming tool and standard PLC
programming languages defined in the IEC 61131/3.
Depending on the configuration, the drive can be used in standalone applications or form part of a larger appliance or installation.
The drive is allowed for use in residential, industrial, and commercial environments in accordance with local laws and standards.

N O T I C E
In a residential environment, this product can cause radio interference, in which case supplementary mitigation measures can be
required.

Foreseeable misuse
Do not use the drive in applications which are non-compliant with specified operating conditions and environments. Ensure com-
pliance with the conditions specified in 12.8 VACON® NXP Technical Data.

3.2 Manual Version

This manual is regularly reviewed and updated. All suggestions for improvement are welcome.
The original language of this manual is English.

Table 1: Manual and Software Version

Edition Remarks

DPD00910J Changed information about FR10 Standalone drive structure in 6.5.6 Installing the Cables, FR10 Standalone and
12.2.4.1 Dimensions for FR10–FR11 Standalone.
Added Z class definition for protection rating in 3.4 Description of the Type Code.
Added tightening torque information for FR8 in 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.
Other minor changes.

3.3 Package Label

The package label gives detailed information about the delivery.

16 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

e30bf961.10
A B

A C DR I V E B.ID : 171208 1003322235

C
Type: NXP00875-A2H1SSS-A1A2000000

D
S/ N : V00001687465

V00001687465

Code: 7DP-008752-116SC8

7DP-008752-116SC8
135X9219

E
INPUT: Uin:3~AC,380-500V, 50/60Hz,
F OUTPUT:
87A 40°C / 72A 50°C
3~AC,0-Uin, 0-320Hz,
87A 40°C / 72A 50°C
G POWER : 45kW:400V / 60HP:480V
IP21/Type1
H Firm w are : NXP00002V195
Appl i cat i on :
I Cu st . Or d . No : 0018131571
Ma r k s:

Danfoss Limited
Made in Finland
Danfoss A/S, 6430 Nordborg, Denmark

Illustration 1: Package Label of VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drives

A The batch ID F The nominal output current

B The order number of VACON® G The protection rating

C The type code H The firmware code

D The serial number I The order number of the customer

E The mains voltage

3.4 Description of the Type Code

The type code of VACON® is made of standard codes and optional codes. Each part of the type code agrees to the data in the order.
Example
The code can have this format, for example:
• NXP00035-A2H1SSV-A1A2C30000+DNOT

Table 2: Description of the Type Code

Code Description

VACON This part is same for all the products.

NXP The product range:

• NXP = VACON® NXP
• NXS = VACON® NXS

0003 The drive rating in amperes. For example, 0003 = 3 A

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 17

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

Code Description

5 The mains voltage:

• 2 = 208–240 V
• 5 = 380–500 V
• 6 = 525–690 V (IEC)
525–600 V (cULus)

A The control panel:

• A = standard (text display)
• B = no local control panel
• F = dummy keypad
• G = graphical display

2 The protection rating:

• 0 = IP00
• 2 = IP21 (UL Type 1)
• 5 = IP54 (UL Type 12)
• T = flange-mounted (through-hole mounted), power part IP54, control part IP21
• Z = flange-mounted (through-hole mounted), power part IP54, control part IP00

H The EMC emission level:

• C = complies with the category C1 of standard IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1, 1st environment, and nominal voltage
less than 1000 V
• H = complies with the category C2 of standard IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1, fixed installations, and nominal voltage
less than 1000 V
• L = complies with the category C3 of standard IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1, 2nd environment, and nominal voltage
less than 1000 V
• T = complies with the standard IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1 when used in IT networks (C4).
• N = No EMC emission protection. An external EMC filter is necessary.

1 The brake chopper:(1)

• 0 = No brake chopper
• 1 = Internal brake chopper
• 2 = Internal brake chopper and resistor, available for:
- 208–240 V (FR4–FR6)
- 380–500 V (FR4–FR6)

SSV The hardware changes:

• The supply, the first letter (Xxx):
- S = 6-pulse connection (FR4 to FR11)
- B = Additional DC-connection (FR8 to FR11)
- O = Standard and input switch (Standalone)
- J = FR10 to 11 standalone with main switch and DC-link terminals

18 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

Code Description

- P = Standard and input swithc UL (Standalone)

- K = DC link connectors and input switch UL (standalone)
• The mounting, the second letter: (xXx):
- S = Air-cooled drive
• The boards, the third letter (xxX):
- S = Standard boards (FR4 to FR8)
- V = Coated boards (FR4 to FR8)
- F = Standard boards (FR9 to FR11)
- G = Coated boards (FR9 to FR11)
- A = Fiber, Integrated control (FR10 to FR11 standalone drives)
- B = Fiber, Integrated control, Coated boards (FR10 to FR11 standalone drives)
- N = separate IP54 (UL Type 12) control box, standard boards, fiber connection (FR9 IP00, ≥ FR10)
- O = separate IP54 (UL Type 12) control box, coated boards, fiber connection (FR9 IP00, ≥ FR10)
- X = separate IP00 control box, standard boards (FR9 IP00)
- Y = separate IP00 control box, coated boards (FR9 IP00)

A1A2C30000 The option boards. 2 characters for each slot. 00 = the slot is not used
The option board abbreviations:
• A = basic I/O board
• B = expander I/O board
• C = fieldbus board
• D = special board
• E = fieldbus board
For example, E3 = PROFIBUS DP

+DNOT The optional codes. See full list of option codes in the VACON® NXP Selection Guide.

1 A brake resistor is available as an option for external installation for 208–240 V (FR7–FR11), 380–500 V (FR7–FR11), and 525–690 V (all enclosure

sizes).

3.5 Enclosure Sizes

Example
The codes for nominal current and nominal mains voltage are part of the type code (see 3.4 Description of the Type Code) on the
package label (see 3.3 Package Label). Use these values to find out the enclosure size of the AC drive from the table.
In the example "NXP00035-A2H1SSS-A1A2C30000+DNOT", the code for nominal current is 0003 and the code for nominal mains
voltage is 5.

Table 3: Enclosure Sizes

Nominal mains voltage Nominal current Enclosure size

2 (208–240 V) 0003 FR4

0004

0007

0008

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 19

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

Nominal mains voltage Nominal current Enclosure size

0011

0012

0017 FR5

0025

0031

0048 FR6

0061

0075 FR7

0088

0114

0140 FR8

0170

0205

0261 FR9

0300

5 (380–500 V) 0003 FR4

0004

0005

0007

0009

0012

0016 FR5

0022

0031

0038 FR6

0045

20 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

Nominal mains voltage Nominal current Enclosure size

0061

0072 FR7

0087

0105

0140 FR8

0168

0205

0261 FR9

0300

0385 FR10 Standalone

0460

0520

0590 FR11 Standalone

0650

0730

6 (500–690 V) 0004 FR6

0005

0007

0010

0013

0018

0022

0027

0034

0041 FR7

0052

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 21

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

Nominal mains voltage Nominal current Enclosure size

0062 FR8

0080

0100

0125 FR9

0144

0177

0205

0261 FR10 Standalone

0325

0385

0416

0460 FR11 Standalone

0502

0590

3.6 Available Protection Ratings

Table 4: Available Protection Ratings

Mains voltage Enclosure size IP21 (UL Type 1) IP54 (UL Type 12)

208–240 V FR4–FR9 x x

350–500 V FR4–FR9 x x

350–500 V FR10 Standalone x x

350–500 V FR11 Standalone x –

525–690 V FR4-FR9 x x

525–690 V FR10 Standalone x x

525–690 V FR11 Standalone x –

3.7 Available EMC Classes

The product standard (EMC immunity requirements) IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1 has 5 categories. The VACON® AC drives are divided into 5
EMC classes that have equivalents in the standard. All VACON® NX AC drives comply with the standard IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1.
The type code tells which category requirement the AC drive complies with (see 3.4 Description of the Type Code).

22 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

The category changes when these properties in the AC drive change:

• the level of electromagnetic disturbances
• the requirements of a power system network
• the installation environment (see the standard IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1)

Table 5: Available EMC Classes

EMC class VACON® Description Available for

in IEC/EN equiva-
61800-3 + lent
A1 EMC
class

C1 C The best EMC protection. These AC drives have the nominal voltage of less than 380–500 V, FR4
1000 V. They are used in the 1st environment. to FR6, IP54 (UL
Type 12)
N O T I C E
If the protection rating of the AC drive is IP21 (UL Type 1), only the conducted
emissions are in the requirements of category C1.

C2 H Includes AC drives in fixed installations. These AC drives have the nominal voltage 380–500 V, FR4
of less than 1000 V. The category C2 AC drives can be used in the 1st and the 2nd to FR9 and 208–
environment. 240 V, FR4 to
FR9

C3 L Includes AC drives that have the nominal voltage of less than 1000 V. These AC IP21 (UL Type 1)
drives are used in the 2nd environment only. and IP54 (UL
Type 12) in
380–500 V FR10
and larger, 525–
690 V FR6 and
larger

C4 T These AC drives comply with the standard IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1 if they are used in All products
IT systems. In IT systems, the networks are isolated from ground, or connected to
ground through high impedance to decrease the leakage current.

N O T I C E
If the AC drives are used with other supplies, they do not comply with the EMC
requirements.

To change the EMC class of the VACON® NX AC drive from C2 or C3 to C4, see the
instructions in 6.6 Installation in an IT System.

No EMC N The AC drives of this category do not give EMC emission protection. These drives In IP00
emission are installed in enclosures.
protection
N O T I C E
An external EMC filter is usually necessary to comply with the EMC emission re-
quirements.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 23

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

EMC class VACON® Description Available for

in IEC/EN equiva-
61800-3 + lent
A1 EMC
class

N O T I C E
RADIO INTERFERENCE
In a residential environment, this product can cause radio interference.
- Take supplementary mitigation measures.

3.8 Control Panel

3.8.1 Introduction to Control Panel

The control panel is the interface between the AC drive and the user. Use the control panel to control the speed of a motor and
monitor the status of the AC drive. Use it also to set the parameters of the AC drive.
The control panel can be removed from the AC drive. The control panel is isolated from the input line potential.

3.8.2 Keypad
The VACON® keypad has 9 buttons with which to control the AC drive (and motor), set parameters, and monitor values.

A B C
L
e30bf978.10

ready run fault

K
D
reset
E
J

select enter

I H G

Illustration 2: Keypad Buttons for VACON® NXP

24 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

A The [ready] LED is on when the AC power is connec- G The [enter] button. Use it to accept a selection, reset
ted to the drive and no faults are active. At the same the fault history (push for 2–3 s).
time, the drive status indication shows READY.
H The Browser button Down. Use it to scroll the main
B The [run] LED is on when the drive operates. The menu and the pages of different submenus and to
LED blinks when the Stop button is pushed and the decrease a value.
drive ramps down.
I The [select] button. Use it to move between 2 last
C The [fault] LED blinks when the AC drive is stopped displays, for example, to see how new value
because of dangerous conditions (Fault Trip). See changes some other value.
8.5.1 Finding the Active Faults Menu.
J The Menu button Left. Use it to move back in the
D The Start button. When the keypad is the active con- menu, move the cursor left (in the Parameter menu).
trol mode, this button starts the motor. See 8.4.3
Changing the Control Mode. K The [reset] button. Use it to reset a fault.

E The Stop button. The button stops the motor (unless L The Browser button Up. Use it to scroll the main
the stop is disabled by the parameter R3.4/R3.6). See menu and the pages of different submenus and to
8.4.2 Keypad Control Parameters M3. increase a value.

F The Menu button Right. Use it to move forward in

the menu, move the cursor right (in the parameter
menu) and to go to the edit mode.

A B C
e30bg072.10

L
ready run fault
K START
D
reset
STOP
J E

F
select enter

I H G

Illustration 3: Keypad Buttons for VACON® NXS

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 25

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

A The [ready] LED is on when the AC power is connec- G The [enter] button. Use it to accept a selection, reset
ted to the drive and no faults are active. At the same the fault history (push for 2–3 s).
time, the drive status indication shows READY.
H The Browser button Down. Use it to scroll the main
B The [run] LED is on when the drive operates. The menu and the pages of different submenus and to
LED blinks when the Stop button is pushed and the decrease a value.
drive ramps down.
I The [select] button. Use it to move between 2 last
C The [fault] LED blinks when the AC drive is stopped displays, for example, to see how new value
because of dangerous conditions (Fault Trip). See changes some other value.
8.5.1 Finding the Active Faults Menu.
J The Menu button Left. Use it to move back in the
D The [START] button. When the keypad is the active menu, move the cursor left (in the Parameter menu).
control mode, this button starts the motor. See 8.4.3
Changing the Control Mode. K The [reset] button. Use it to reset a fault.

E The [STOP] button. The button stops the motor (un- L The Browser button Up. Use it to scroll the main
less the stop is disabled by the parameter R3.4/R3.6). menu and the pages of different submenus and to
See 8.4.2 Keypad Control Parameters M3. increase a value.

F The Menu button Right. Use it to move forward in

the menu, move the cursor right (in the parameter
menu) and to go to the edit mode.

3.8.3 Display
The following figure describes the sections of the display.

A B C D E F G
e30bf979.10

RUN STOP READY ALARM FAULT

K
I/O term Keypad Bus/Comm

L H I J

Illustration 4: Display Indications

A The motor is in RUN state. The indication starts to H The I/O terminals is the active control mode.
blink when a stop command is given and blinks
while the speed continues to decrease. I The control panel is the active control mode.

B The motor rotation direction is forward. J The fieldbus is the active control mode.

C The motor rotation direction is reverse. K The location indication. The line shows the symbol
and number of the menu, parameter, and so on. For
D The drive does not operate. example, M2 = Menu 2 (Parameters) or P2.1.3 = Ac-
celeration time.
E The AC power is on.
L The description line. The line shows the description
F An alarm is given. of the menu, value, or fault.
G A fault is given and the AC drive is stopped. M The value line. The line shows the numerical and
text values of references, parameters, and so on. It
also shows the number of submenus that are availa-
ble in each menu.

26 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Product Overview

The drive status indicators (A–G) give information about the status of the motor and the AC drive.
The control mode indications (H, I, J) show the selection of the control mode. The control mode tells from where the START/STOP
commands are given and reference values are changed. To make this selection, go to the Keypad control menu (M3) (see 8.4.3
Changing the Control Mode).
The three text lines (K, L, M) give information about the current location in the menu structure and the operation of the drive.

3.8.4 Basic Menu Structure

The data of the AC drive is in menus and submenus. The figure shows the basic menu structure of the AC drive.
This menu structure is only an example and the contents and items can vary depending on the application in use.

Main menu Submenus Main menu Submenus

e30bf981.10
M1 Monitor V1.1 Output frequency M4 Active
V1.2 Frequency ref. faults

V1.3 Motor speed

V1.4 Motor current M5 Fault

history
V1.5 Motor torque

V1.6 Motor power M6 System S6.1 Language selection

menu
V1.7 Motor voltage S6.2
Application selection
V1.8 DC-link voltage S6.3 Copy parameters

V1.9 Unit temperature S6.4 Compare param.

V1.10 Motor temp. S6.5 Security

V1.11 Analogue Input 1 S6.6 Keypad settings
V1.12 Analogue Input 2 S6.7 Hardware settings
V1.13 Current input S6.8 System information
V1.14 DIN1, DIN2, DIN3
S6.9 Power monitor
V1.15 DIN4, DIN5, DIN6 S6.11 Power
multi-monitor
V1.16 Analogue output

V1.17 Multimonit. items

M7
Expander
M2
See Application Manual boards
Parameters

M3 Keypad P3.1 Control place

control R3.2 Keypad reference
P3.3
Direction (on keypad)
P3.4 Stop button

Illustration 5: Basic Menu Structure of the AC Drive

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 27

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Receiving the Delivery

4 Receiving the Delivery

4.1 Checking the Delivery
Before a VACON® AC drive is sent to the customer, the manufacturer makes many tests on the drive.

Procedure
1. After removing the packaging, examine the drive for transport damages.
- If the drive was damaged during the shipping, speak to the cargo insurance company or the carrier.
2. To make sure that the delivery is correct, compare the order data to the data on the package label, see 3.3 Package Label.
- If the delivery does not agree with the order, contact the vendor immediately.
3. To make sure that the contents of the delivery is correct and complete, compare the type code of the product to the type
code, see 3.4 Description of the Type Code.
4. Check that the accessories bag contains the items shown in the figure. These accessories are part of the electrical installa-
tion. The contents of the accessories bag is different for different enclosure sizes and protection ratings.
- FR4/FI4–FR4-FR6: 4.1.1 Accessories for FR4/FI4–FR6/FI6
- FR7/FI7–FR8/FI8: 4.1.2 Accessories for FR7/FI7–FR8/FI8
- FR10–FR11 Standalone: 4.1.3 Accessories for FR10–FR11 Standalone
- Flange mounting accessories kits: see details in Flange Mounting Kit for FR4–FR6 Installation Manual or Flange Mount-
ing Kit for FR7–FR9 Installation Manual.

4.1.1 Accessories for FR4/FI4–FR6/FI6

e30bf975.10
1 3 4 5 6 7 8

Illustration 6: Contents of the Accessories Bag for FR4–FR6/FI4–FI6

1 The grounding terminals (FR4/FI4, FR5), 2 pieces 5 Screws, M4x10, 5 pieces

2 The grounding clamps for control cable, 3 pieces 6 Screws, M4x16, 3 pieces

3 The rubber grommets (sizes vary from class to class), 7 The grounding clamps for grounding conductor
3 pieces (FR6/FI6), 2 pieces

4 The cable entry plate 8 The grounding screws M5x16 (FR6/FI6), 4 pieces

28 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Receiving the Delivery

4.1.2 Accessories for FR7/FI7–FR8/FI8

e30bf976.10
1 2 3 4

Illustration 7: Contents of the Accessories Bag for FR7–FR8/FI7–FI8

1 Screws, M4x16, 3 pieces 3 The rubber grommets GD21 (FR7/FI7 IP54/

UL Type 12), 3 pieces / (FR8/FI8), 6 pieces
2 The grounding clamps for control cable, 3 pieces
4 The rubber grommets GDM36 (FR7/FI7), 3 pieces

4.1.3 Accessories for FR10–FR11 Standalone

The cabinet door key is attached to the lifting rail at the top of the AC drive.
e30bh766.10

Illustration 8: The Cabinet Door Key Location at Delivery

4.2 Storing the Product

If the product has to be stored before installing it, follow these instructions.

Procedure
1. If the AC drive must be stored before using it, make sure that the ambient conditions agree to the following:

- Storage temperature: -40…+70° C (-40...+158° F)

- Relative humidity: 0–95%, no condensation

2. If the AC drive must be kept in storage for a long time, connect the power to the AC drive each year. Keep the power on for
a minimum of 2 hours.
3. If the storage time is more than 12 months, charge the electrolytic DC capacitors with caution. To reform the capacitors,
obey the instructions in 10.2 Reforming the Capacitors.

We do not recommend a long storage time.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 29

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Receiving the Delivery

4.3 Lifting the Product

Lifting instructions depend on the weight of the AC drive. It can be necessary to use a lifting device to move the drive from its
package.

Procedure
1. Check the weight of the AC drive, see 12.1 Weights of the AC Drive.
2. To lift the AC drives larger than FR7/FI7 out of the package, use a jib crane.

e30bh767.10
>60°
>60°

3. After lifting the drive, check for signs of damage on the drive.

30 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Receiving the Delivery

4.4 Using the Product Modified Label

In the accessories bag, there is also a "product modified" label. The function of the label is to tell the service personnel about the
changes that are made in the AC drive.

e30bf977.10
Drive modified:
Option board: NXOPT......... Date:............
in slot: A B C D E Date:............
IP54 upgrade/Collar Date:............
EMC level modified: H/L to T Date:............

Illustration 9: The Product Modified Label

Procedure
1. Attach the label on the side of the AC drive, in a place where it is easy to find.
2. If changes are made to the AC drive, write the change and date on the label.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 31

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Mounting the Unit

5 Mounting the Unit

5.1 Environmental Requirements

5.1.1 General Environmental Requirements

In environments with airborne liquids, particles, or corrosive gases, ensure that the protection rating of the equipment matches the
installation environment. Failure to meet requirements for ambient conditions can reduce the lifetime of the AC drive. Ensure that
requirements for humidity, temperature, and altitude are met.
Vibration and shock
The AC drive complies with requirements for units mounted on the walls and floors of production premises, and in panels bolted to
walls or floors.
AC drive is suitable for marine installations.
For detailed ambient conditions specifications, see 12.8 VACON® NXP Technical Data.
Installation requirements:
• Make sure that there is sufficiently free space around the AC drive for cooling, see 5.2.2 Cooling of FR4 to FR9 or 5.2.3 Cooling of
Standalone AC drives (FR10 to FR11).
• Some free space is also necessary for maintenance.
• Make sure that the mounting surface is sufficiently flat.

5.1.2 High Altitude Installation

The density of air decreases when the altitude increases and the pressure decreases. When the air density decreases, the thermal
capacity decreases (that is, less air removes less heat) and the resistance to electric field (breakdown voltage/distance) decreases.
The full thermal performance of VACON® NX AC drives is designed for installation up to 1000 m altitude. The electric insulation is
designed for installations up to 3000 m altitude (check details for different sizes in Technical Data).
Higher installation locations are possible, when obeying the derating guidelines in this chapter.
For permitted maximum altitudes, see 12.8 VACON® NXP Technical Data.
Above 1000 m, decrease the limited maximum load current by 1% for each 100 m.
For information on option boards and I/O signals and relay outputs, see VACON® NX I/O Boards User Manual.
Example
For example, at 2500 m altitude, decrease the load current down to 85% of the rated output current (100% – (2500–
1000 m) / 100 m x 1% = 85%).
When using fuses at high altitudes, the cooling effect of the fuse decreases as the density of the atmosphere decreases.
When using fuses above 2000 meters, the continuous rating of the fuse:
I = In*(1- (h-2000)/100*0.5/100)
Where
I = Current rating at high altitude
In = Rated current of a fuse
h = Altitude in meters

32 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Mounting the Unit

e30bg030.30
110%
100% C
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
B
0

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000
Illustration 10: Loadability in High Altitudes

A Loadability, % C Loadability

B Altitude, meters

5.2 Cooling Requirements

5.2.1 General Cooling Requirements

The AC drive produces heat in operation. The fan moves air and decreases the temperature of the drive. Make sure that there is
sufficiently free space around the drive.
Make sure that the temperature of the cooling air does not go above the maximum ambient operating temperature or below the
minimum ambient operating temperature of the drive.

5.2.2 Cooling of FR4 to FR9

If many AC drives are installed above each other, the necessary free space is C + D (see Illustration 11). Make also sure that the outlet
air from the lower drive goes to a different direction than the air intake of the top drive.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 33

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Mounting the Unit

e30bg010.10
C

B B

A A
D

Illustration 11: Installation Space

A The clearance around the drive (see also B and C) C The free space above the drive

B The distance from a drive to a second drive, or the D The free space below the drive
distance to the cabinet wall

Table 6: Minimum Clearances around the AC Drive in mm (in inch)

Drive type A B C D

0003 2–0012 2 20 20 100 50

0003 5–0012 5 (0.79) (0.79) (3.94) (1.97)

0017 2–0031 2 20 20 120 60

0016 5–0031 5 (0.79) (0.79) (4.72) (2.36)

0048 2–0061 2 30 20 160 80

0038 5–0061 5 (1.18) (0.79) (6.30) (3.15)
0004 6-0034 6

0075 2–0114 2 80 80 300 100

0072 5–0105 5 (3.15) (3.15) (11.81) (3.94)
0041 6–0052 6

0140 2–0205 2 80 80 300 300

0140 5–0205 5 (3.15) (3.15) (11.81) (11.81)

34 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Mounting the Unit

Drive type A B C D

0062 6–0100 6 (1)

0261 2–0300 2 50 80 400 250 / 350

0261 5–0300 5 (1.97) (3.15) (15.75) (9.84) / (13.78)
0125 6–0208 6 (2)

1
To change the fan with the motor cables connected, the necessary clearance on the 2 sides of the drive is 150 mm (5.91 inch).
2 The minimum clearance to change the fan.

Table 7: Required Cooling Air

Drive type The quantity of cooling air [m3/h] The quantity of cooling air [CFM]

0003 2–0012 2 70 41.2

0003 5–0012 5

0017 2–0031 2 190 112

0016 5–0031 5

0048 2–0061 2 425 250

0038 5–0061 5
0004 6–0034 6

0075 2–0114 2 425 250

0072 5–0105 5
0041 6–0052 6

0140 2–0205 2 650 383

0140 5–0205 5
0062 6–0100 6

0261 2–0300 2 1000 589

0261 5–0300 5
0125 6–0208 6

5.2.3 Cooling of Standalone AC drives (FR10 to FR11)

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 35

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Mounting the Unit

e30bg011.10
B

A
C

Illustration 12: Minimum Clearances around the AC Drive

A The minimum distance to the side walls or adjacent C Free space in front of the cabinet
components

B The minimum distance from the top of the cabinet

Table 8: Minimum Clearances around the AC Drive in mm (in inch)

Drive type A B C

0385 5–0730 5 20 200 800

0261 6–0590 6 (0.79) (7.87) (31.50)

Table 9: Required Cooling Air

Drive type The quantity of cooling air [m3/h] The quantity of cooling air [CFM]

0385 5–0520 5 2000 900

0261 6–0416 6

0590 5–0730 5 3000 1765

0460 6–0590 6

For more information on the power losses in all operating conditions, see http://ecosmart.danfoss.com/.

5.3 Installation Sequence

5.3.1 Installation Sequence for Wall-mounted AC Drives

Use these instructions to install the VACON® NX Wall-mounted AC Drive or VACON® NX Inverter FI4–FI8.

Procedure
1. Select the mounting option:
- Horizontal

36 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Mounting the Unit

If the drive is installed in a horizontal position, there is no protection against drops of water that fall vertically.
- Vertical
- Flange mounting
The AC drive can also be installed into the cabinet wall with a flange mounting option (through hole mounting). With
the flange mounting, the protection rating of the power unit is IP54 (UL Type 12) and the protection rating of the con-
trol unit is IP21 (UL Type 1).
For details, see separate Flange Mounting Kit for FR4–FR6 Installation Manual or Flange Mounting Kit for FR7–FR9 In-
stallation Manual.
2. Check the dimensions of the AC drive, see 12.2.1 List of Dimension Information.
3. Make sure that there is sufficiently free space around the AC drive for cooling, see 5.2.2 Cooling of FR4 to FR9. Some free
space is also necessary for maintenance.
4. Attach the AC drive with the screws and other components in the delivery.

5.3.2 Installation Sequence for Standalone AC Drives

Use these instructions to install the standalone AC drive.

Procedure
1. Make sure that the mounting surface is sufficiently flat.
2. Check the dimensions of the AC drive, see 12.2.4.1 Dimensions for FR10–FR11 Standalone.
3. Make sure that there is sufficiently free space around the AC drive for cooling, see 5.2.3 Cooling of Standalone AC drives
(FR10 to FR11). Some free space is also necessary for maintenance.
4. The enclosures have fixing holes. If needed, fix the AC Drive to the wall.
e30bh790.10

1 Fixing hole, Ø= 13 mm (0.51 in)

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 37

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6 Electrical Installation
6.1 Cable Connections
The mains cables are connected to terminals L1, L2, and L3. The motor cables are connected to terminals U, V, and W.

e30bg078.20
B

L1 U/T1

L2 V/T2

L3 W/T3
B+/R+

R-
B-

R
Illustration 13: Principal Connection Diagram

A The control panel C The power unit

B The control unit

For EMC-compliant installation, see 6.2 EMC-compliant Installation.

6.1.1 General Cable Requirements

Use cables with a minimum heat resistance of +70 °C (158 °F). In the selection of the cables and the fuses, refer to the nominal
output current of the drive. Find the nominal output current on the nameplate.
We recommend selecting the cables and the fuses to agree with the output current because the input current of the AC drive is
almost the same as the output current.
For information on how to make the cable installation to comply with the UL standards, see 6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling.
If the motor temperature protection of the drive (see VACON® All in One Application Manual) is used as an overload protection,
select the cable to agree with the protection. If 3 or more cables are used in parallel for larger AC drives, use a separate overload
protection for each cable.
These instructions are valid only for processes that have 1 motor and 1 cable connection from the AC drive to the motor. In other
conditions, speak to the manufacturer to get more information.

6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling

To comply with the UL (Underwriters Laboratories) regulations, use a UL-approved copper wire with a minimum heat resistance of
60 °C or 75 °C (140 °F or 167 °F).
To comply with the standards, use cables with +90 °C (194 °F) heat resistance for sizes 0170 2 and 0168 5 (FR8), and 0261 2, 0261 5,
0300 2 and 0300 5 (FR9).
Use Class 1 wire only.
When the drive has Class T and J fuses, it can be used on a circuit that gives a maximum of 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes, and a
maximum of 600 V.

38 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

The integral solid-state short-circuit protection does not give a branch circuit protection. Obey the National Electric Code and any
additional local codes to get the branch circuit protection. Only fuses give the branch circuit protection.
For the tightening torques of the terminals, see 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.

6.1.3 Cable Selection and Dimensioning

Find the typical sizes and types of cables used with the AC drive in the tables in 12.3.1 List of Cable and Fuse Size Information. In the
selection of cables, refer to local regulations, cable installation conditions, and cable specification.
The dimensions of the cables must comply with the requirements of the standard IEC60364-5-52.
• The maximum ambient temperature is +30 °C.
• The maximum temperature of the cable surface is +70 °C.
• Use only motor cables with a concentric copper shield.
• The maximum number of parallel cables is 9.
When using parallel cables, make sure to obey the requirements of the cable cross-sections.
For important information on the requirements of the grounding conductor, see 6.3 Grounding.
For the correction factors for each temperature, see the standard IEC60364-5-52.

6.1.4 Cable Selection and Dimensioning, North America

Find the typical sizes and types of cables used with the AC drive in the tables in 12.3.1 List of Cable and Fuse Size Information. In the
selection of cables, refer to local regulations, cable installation conditions, and cable specification.
The dimensions of the cables must comply with the requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electric
Code (CEC).
• The maximum ambient temperature is +86 °F.
• The maximum temperature of the cable surface is +158 °F.
• Use only motor cables with a concentric copper shield.
• The maximum number of parallel cables is 9.
When using parallel cables, make sure to obey the requirements of the cross-sectional area and the maximum number of cables.
For important information on the requirements of the grounding conductor, see the NEC and CEC.
For the correction factors for each temperature, see the instructions of NEC and CEC.

6.1.5 Fuse Selection

We recommend the fuse type gG/gL (IEC 60269-1). To make a selection of the fuse voltage rating, refer to the mains. Refer also to
local regulations, cable installation conditions, and cable specification. Do not use larger fuses than what is recommended.
External fuses in the input line are required for overload and short-circuit protection of the drive.
Find the recommended fuses in tables in 12.3.1 List of Cable and Fuse Size Information.
Make sure that the operation time of the fuse is less than 0.4 s. The operation time agrees with the fuse type and the impedance of
the supply circuit. For more information on faster fuses, speak to the manufacturer. The manufacturer can also recommend some aR
(UL recognized, IEC 60269-4) and gS (IEC 60269-4) fuse ranges.

6.1.6 Principle of the Power Unit Topology

The principles for mains and motor connections of the basic 6-pulse drive in enclosure sizes FR4 to FR11 show in Illustration 14.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 39

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

e30bg080.10
FR4-9/FR10/ FR11 *)
FR11 0460 6 & 0502 6

A C

B B

Illustration 14: Topology of Enclosure Sizes FR4 – FR11

A Single input C Double input

B Single output * The FR11 types 0460 6 and 0502 6 have single input
terminal.

6.1.7 Brake Resistor Cables

VACON® NXS/NXP AC drives have terminals for the DC supply and an optional external brake resistor. These terminals are identified
with B–, B+/R+, and R–. The DC bus connection is made to terminals B– and B+ and the brake resistor connection to R+ and R–.
Danfoss recommends shielded motor cable to be used for the brake resistor. Only two conductors of a normal three phase cable are
needed. The shield of the cable must be connected at each end. 360 ° grounding of the shield is recommended to minimize interfer-
ence. The third, unused connector must be grounded by connecting it to ground at one end.
See list of recommended cables in 12.3.1 List of Cable and Fuse Size Information.

C A U T I O N
SHOCK HAZARD FROM MULTI-CONDUCTOR CABLES
With a multi-conductor cable, the conductors that are not connected can cause an accidental contact with a conducting compo-
nent.
- If a multi-conductor cable is used, cut off all conductors that are not connected.

The enclosure sizes FR8 and larger have the DC connection as optional.
If it is necessary to connect an external brake resistor, see VACON® Brake Resistor Manual. See also 8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake
Resistor Connection.

6.2 EMC-compliant Installation

For cable selections in different EMC levels, see Table 10.
For the EMC levels C1 and C2, it is necessary to have a 360º grounding of the shield on both ends of the motor cable.

Table 10: Recommendations for Cables

Cable Category C1 and C2(1) Category C3(2) Category C4(2) No EMC protection(2)
type

Motor ca- A symmetrical power cable with a compact low- A symmetrical power cable with a concentric protection wire.
ble impedance shield. A cable for the specified mains voltage.
A cable for the specified mains voltage. We recommend an NKCABLES/MCMK cable. See Illustration 15.
We recommend an NKCABLES /MCCMK, SAB/
ÖZCUY-J or equivalent cable. See Illustration 15.

Mains ca- A power cable for a fixed installation.

ble A cable for the specified mains voltage.
A shielded cable is not necessary.

40 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

Cable Category C1 and C2(1) Category C3(2) Category C4(2) No EMC protection(2)
type

We recommend an NKCABLES/MCMK cable.

Control A shielded cable with a compact low-impedance shield, for example an NKCABLES/ JAMAK, or an SAB/ÖZCuY-O
cable cable.

1
1st environment
2 2nd environment
For the definitions of EMC protection levels, see IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1.

e30bg079.10
A B

Illustration 15: Cables with PE Conductors

A The PE conductor and the shield C The shield

B The PE conductors

In all the enclosure sizes, to comply with the EMC standards, use the default values of the switching frequencies.
When using a safety switch, make sure that the EMC protection continues from the start of the cables until their ends.
The drive must obey the standard IEC 61000-3-12. To obey it, the short circuit power SSC must be a minimum of 120 RSCE at the
interface point between mains and the public mains. Make sure to connect the drive and the motor to mains with a short circuit
power SSC that is a minimum of 120 RSCE. If necessary, contact the mains operator.

6.2.1 Installation in a Corner-grounded Network

Corner-grounding can be used with the drive types (FR4 to FR9) with a rating of 3–300 A with a 208–240 V mains, and 261–730 A
with a 380–500 V mains. In these conditions, change the EMC protection level to C4. See the instructions in 6.6 Installation in an IT
System.
Do not use corner-grounding with the drive types (FR4 to FR8) with a rating of 3–205 A with a 380–500 V mains or with a 525–690 V
mains.
Corner-grounding is permitted for the FR4–FR9 drives (main voltage 208–240 V) up to 3000 m and for the FR9–FR11 drives (main
voltage 380–500 V) up to 2000 m.

6.3 Grounding
Ground the AC drive in accordance with applicable standards and directives.

C A U T I O N
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM INSUFFICIENT GROUNDING
Not using a grounding conductor can damage the drive.
- Make sure that the AC drive is always grounded with a grounding conductor that is connected to the grounding terminal
that is identified with the PE symbol.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 41

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

W A R N I N G
LEAKAGE CURRENT HAZARD
Leakage currents exceed 3.5 mA. Failure to ground the drive properly can result in death or serious injury.
- Ensure the correct grounding of the equipment by a certified electrical installer.

The standard EN 61800-5-1 tells that 1 or more of these conditions for the protective circuit must be true.
The connection must be fixed.
• The protective earthing conductor must have a cross-sectional area of minimum 10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al. OR
• There must be an automatic disconnection of the mains, if the protective earthing conductor breaks. OR
• There must be a terminal for a second protective earthing conductor in the same cross-sectional area as the first protective
earthing conductor.

Cross-sectional area of the phase conductors (S) [mm2] The minimum cross-sectional area of the protective earthing con-
ductor in question [mm2]

S ≤ 16 S

16 < S ≤ 35 16

35 < S S/2

The values of the table are valid only if the protective earthing conductor is made of the same metal as the phase conductors. If this
is not so, the cross-sectional area of the protective earthing conductor must be determined in a manner that produces a conduc-
tance equivalent to that which results from the application of this table.
The cross-sectional area of each protective earthing conductor that is not a part of the mains cable or the cable enclosure, must be a
minimum of:
• 2.5 mm2 if there is mechanical protection, and
• 4 mm2 if there is not mechanical protection. With cord-connected equipment, make sure that the protective earthing conductor
in the cord is the last conductor to be interrupted, if the strain-relief mechanism breaks.
Obey the local regulations on the minimum size of the protective earthing conductor.

N O T I C E
MALFUNCTION OF FAULT CURRENT PROTECTIVE SWITCHES
Because there are high capacitive currents in the AC drive, it is possible that the fault current protective switches do not operate
correctly.

N O T I C E
VOLTAGE WITHSTAND TESTS
Doing voltage withstand tests can damage the drive.
- Do not do voltage withstand tests on the AC drive. The manufacturer has already done the tests.

W A R N I N G
SHOCK HAZARD FROM PE CONDUCTOR
The drive can cause a DC current in the PE conductor. Failure to use a residual current-operated protective (RCD) device Type B or
a residual current-operated monitoring (RCM) device can lead to the RCD not providing the intended protection and therefore
can result in death or serious injury.
- Use a type B RCD or RCM device on the mains side of the drive.

42 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4 Get Access and Locate the Terminals

6.4.1 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR4/FI4

Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Open the cover of the AC drive.

e30bg082.10

2. Remove the screws of the cable cover. Remove the cable cover. Do not open the cover of the power unit.


e30bg084.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 43

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Locate the terminals.

e30bg089.10
B C

Illustration 16: FR4/FI4 Terminals

A Mains terminals C Motor terminals

B Brake resistor terminals D Grounding terminals

44 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4.2 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR5

Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Open the cover of the AC drive.

e30bg083.10

2. Remove the screws of the cable cover. Remove the cable cover. Do not open the cover of the power unit.


e30bg084.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 45

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Locate the terminals.

e30bg090.10
B C

D
FR5
Illustration 17: FR5 Terminals

A Mains terminals C Motor terminals

B Brake resistor terminals D Grounding terminals

46 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4.3 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR6/FI6

Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Open the cover of the AC drive.

e30bg083.10

2. Remove the screws of the cable cover. Remove the cable cover. Do not open the cover of the power unit.


e30bg084.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 47

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Locate the terminals.

e30bg091.10
A B C

D
FR6
Illustration 18: FR6/FI6 Terminals

A Mains terminals C Motor terminals

B Brake resistor terminals D Grounding clamp

48 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4.4 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR7/FI7

Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Open the cover of the AC drive.

e30bg083.10

2. Remove the screws of the cable cover. Remove the cable cover. Do not open the cover of the power unit.


e30bg084.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 49

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Locate the terminals.

e30bg092.10
A B C

D
FR7
Illustration 19: FR7/FI7 Terminals

A Mains terminals C Motor terminals

B Brake resistor terminals D Grounding terminals

50 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4.5 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR8/FI8

Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Open the cover of the AC drive.

e30bg031.10
2. Open the power unit cover.


e30bg032.10

3. Find the DC terminals and Brake resistor terminals on top of the AC drive.


e30bg076.10

B- B+
R+ R-

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 51

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

4. Locate the terminals.

e30bg102.10
A B

FR8 C

Illustration 20: FR8/FI8 Terminals

A Mains terminals C Grounding terminals

B Motor terminals

52 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4.6 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR9

Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Remove the cable cover.

e30bg075.10
2. Find the DC terminals and Brake resistor terminals on top of the AC drive.


e30bg076.10

B- B+
R+ R-

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 53

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Locate the terminals.

A B

e30bg103.10

C
FR9
Illustration 21: FR9 Terminals

A Mains terminals C Grounding terminals

B Motor terminals

54 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4.7 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR10 Standalone
Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Remove the protective covers.

e30bh771.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 55

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Locate the terminals.

e30bh768.10
1

B- B+/ R-
R+

L1 L2 L3

4
5

Illustration 22: FR10 Standalone Terminals

1 Brake resistor and DC terminals 4 Mains terminals

2 Control terminals 5 Grounding busbar

3 Motor terminals

56 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6.4.8 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR11 Standalone
Follow these instructions to open the AC drive for installing the cables.

Procedure
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Remove the protective covers.

e30bh772.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 57

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Locate the terminals.

e30bh769.10
1

B+/ R-
B- R+

U/T1 V/T1 W/T1

1L1 1L2 1L3 2L1 2L2 2L3

Illustration 23: FR11 Standalone Terminals

1 Brake resistor and DC terminals 4 Mains terminals 1

2 Control terminals 5 Grounding busbar

3 Motor terminals 6 Mains terminals 2

58 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

e30bh770.10
B- B+
R+ R-

U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

L1 L2 L3

Illustration 24: FR11 Standalone Terminals, 0460–0502, 690 V

1 Brake resistor and DC terminals 4 Mains terminals

2 Control terminals 5 Grounding busbar

3 Motor terminals

6.5 Installing the Cables

Use these instructions to find the installation instructions of the correct enclosure size.

Procedure
1. Check the requirements related to lengths, distances, and positioning of the cables according to instructions in 6.5.1 Addi-
tional Instructions for Cable Installation.
2. Follow the installation instructions of the correct enclosure size. To check the enclosure size of the AC drive, see 3.5 Enclo-
sure Sizes .

- 6.5.2 Installing the Cables, FR4–FR6/FI4–FI6

- 6.5.3 Installing the Cables, FR7/FI7
- 6.5.4 Installing the Cables, FR8/FI8

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 59

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

- 6.5.5 Installing the Cables, FR9

- 6.5.6 Installing the Cables, FR10 Standalone
- 6.5.7 Installing the Cables, FR11 Standalone

6.5.1 Additional Instructions for Cable Installation

• Before starting, make sure that none of the components of the AC drive is live. Read carefully the warnings in Safety section.
• Make sure that the motor cables are sufficiently far from other cables.
• The motor cables must go across other cables at an angle of 90°.
• If it is possible, do not put the motor cables in long parallel lines with other cables.
• If the motor cables are in parallel with other cables, obey the minimum distances (see Table 11).
• The distances are also valid between the motor cables and the signal cables of other systems.
• The maximum lengths of shielded motor cables are 300 m (984 ft) (AC drives with power greater than 1.5 kW or 2 hp), and
100 m (328 ft) (AC drives with power from 0.75 kW to 1.5 kW or 1–2 hp). If the used motor cables are longer, speak to the factory
to get more information.
Each parallel cable adds to the total length.

N O T I C E
If long motor cables are used (maximum 100 m or 328 ft) together with small drives (≤1.5 kW or ≤2.01 hp), the capacitive
current in the motor cable can increase the measured motor current compared to the actual motor current. Consider it when
setting up the motor stall protection functions.

• If the cable insulation checks are necessary, see 9.3 Measuring the Cable and Motor Insulation.

Table 11: Minimum Distances between Cables

The distance between ca- The length of the shielded cable The distance between ca- The length of the shielded cable
bles [m] [m] bles [ft] [ft]

0.3 ≤ 50 1.0 ≤ 164.0

1.0 ≤ 300 3.3 ≤ 656.1

6.5.2 Installing the Cables, FR4–FR6/FI4–FI6

Follow these instructions to install the cables and cable accessories.
For information on how to comply with the UL regulations in cable installation, see 6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling.
If it is necessary to connect an external brake resistor, see VACON® Brake Resistor Manual. See also 8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake
Resistor Connection.

Make sure that the delivery contains all necessary components. For the installation, the contents of the accessories bag is needed,
see 4.1 Checking the Delivery.
Open the covers according to instructions in 6.4.1 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR4/FI4, 6.4.2 Get Access and Locate the
Terminals for FR5 or 6.4.3 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR6/FI6.
Procedure
1. Strip the motor cable, the mains cable, and the brake resistor cable. See 12.4 Cable Stripping Lengths.
2. Cut the grommets open to move the cables through them. Use the grommets delivered in the accessories bag.
- Do not cut the grommet openings wider than what is necessary for the used cables.
- If the grommets fold in when putting the cable, pull the cable back to make the grommets straight.

60 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

e30bg086.10

3. To achieve EMC class C1 and C2, use EMC cable gland as an alternative to the grommet.

e30bh837.10
1 2 10 m
m

3 4

4. Put the cables – the mains cable, the motor cable, and the optional brake cable – in the openings of the cable entry plate.
Use the cable entry plate delivered in the accessories bag.


e30bg085.10

Illustration 25: Cables through the Cable Entry Plate

A The mains cable C The motor cable

B The brake cable

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 61

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

5. Put the cable entry plate with the cables into the groove on the frame of the drive. To attach the cable entry plate, use the
M4x10 screws delivered in the accessories bag.

e30bg088.10

6. Connect the cables. See the correct tightening torques in 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.

- Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable and of the motor cable, and the conductors of the brake resistor
cable into the correct terminals.
- FR4/FI4, FR5: Attach the grounding conductor of each cable with a grounding terminal. Use the grounding terminals
delivered in the accessories bag.
- FR6/FI6: Attach the grounding conductor of each cable with a grounding clamp for grounding conductor. Use the
grounding clamps and the screws delivered in the accessories bag.

7. Make sure to connect the grounding conductor to the motor and the terminals that are identified with the grounding sym-
bol.

- For FR4/FI4 and FR5: Two protective conductors are necessary to comply with the requirements of the standard
IEC/EN 61800-5-1. See 6.3 Grounding.
- If a double grounding is necessary, use the grounding terminal below the drive. Use an M5 screw and tighten it to 2.0
Nm or 17.7 lb-in.
e30bg093.10

8. Attach the cable cover 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws.

62 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

9. Attach the grounding clamps for control cable with 3 pieces of M4x16 screws delivered in the accessories bag. Use these
clamps to ground the control cables. Connect the control cables.

e30bg070.10

Illustration 26: FR4-FR6/FI4-FI6

10. Attach the cover of the drive. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws. Make
sure that the control cables or the cables of the AC drive are not caught between the frame and the cable cover.

6.5.3 Installing the Cables, FR7/FI7

Follow these instructions to install the cables and cable accessories.
For information on how to comply with the UL regulations in cable installation, see 6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling.
If it is necessary to connect an external brake resistor, see VACON® Brake Resistor Manual. See also 8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake
Resistor Connection.

Make sure that the delivery contains all necessary components. For the installation, the contents of the accessories bag is needed,
see 4.1 Checking the Delivery.
Open the covers according to instructions in 6.4.4 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR7/FI7.
Procedure
1. Strip the motor cable, the mains cable, and the brake resistor cable. See 12.4 Cable Stripping Lengths.
2. Cut the grommets open to move the cables through them. Use the grommets delivered in the accessories bag.
- Do not cut the grommet openings wider than what is necessary for the used cables.
- If the grommets fold in when putting the cable, pull the cable back to make the grommets straight.


e30bg086.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 63

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. To achieve EMC class C2, use EMC cable gland as an alternative to the grommet.

e30bh837.10
1 2 10 m
m

3 4

4. Put the cables – the mains cable, the motor cable, and the optional brake cable – in the openings of the cable entry plate.
Use the cable entry plate delivered in the accessories bag.


e30bg085.10

Illustration 27: Cables through the Cable Entry Plate

A The mains cable C The motor cable

B The brake cable

5. Put the cable entry plate with the cables into the groove on the frame of the drive. To attach the cable entry plate, use the
M4x10 screws delivered in the accessories bag.


e30bg088.10

64 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6. Connect the cables. See the correct tightening torques in 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.

- Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable and of the motor cable, and the conductors of the brake resistor
cable into the correct terminals.
- Attach the grounding conductor of each cable with a grounding clamp.

7. Make sure to connect the grounding conductor to the motor and the terminals that are identified with the grounding sym-
bol.

- If a double grounding is necessary, use the grounding terminal below the drive. Use an M5 screw and tighten it to 2.0
Nm or 17.7 lb-in.

e30bg093.10

8. Attach the cable cover 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 65

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

9. Attach the grounding clamps for control cable with 3 pieces of M4x16 screws delivered in the accessories bag. Use these
clamps to ground the control cables. Connect the control cables.

e30bg073.10
1

Illustration 28: FR7/FI7

1 Standard

2 PROFIBUS

10. Attach the cover of the drive. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws. Make
sure that the control cables or the cables of the AC drive are not caught between the frame and the cable cover.

6.5.4 Installing the Cables, FR8/FI8

Follow these instructions to install the cables and cable accessories.
For information on how to comply with the UL regulations in cable installations, see 6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling.
If it is necessary to connect an external brake resistor, see VACON® Brake Resistor Manual. See also 8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake
Resistor Connection.

Make sure that the delivery contains all necessary components. For the installation, the contents of the accessories bag is needed,
see 4.1 Checking the Delivery.
Open the covers according to instructions in 6.4.5 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR8/FI8.
Procedure
1. Strip the motor cable, the mains cable, and the brake resistor cable. See 12.4 Cable Stripping Lengths

66 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

2. To move the cables through the grommets, cut them open. Use the grommets delivered in the accessories bag.
- Do not cut the grommet openings wider than what is necessary for the used cables.
- If the grommets fold in when putting the cable, pull the cable back to make the grommets straight.
- Cable gland can be used if preferred.

e30bh277.10

Illustration 29: Cutting the Grommet in IP54


e30bh278.10

3. Attach the grommet and the cable until the frame of the drive goes into the groove of the grommet.

- With the protection rating IP54 (UL Type 12), the connection between the grommet and the cable must be tight. Pull
the first bit of the cable out of the grommet until it stays straight.
- If it is not possible, make the connection tight with some insulation tape or a cable tie.


e30bg077.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 67

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

4. Connect the cables. See the correct tightening torques in 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.

- Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable and of the motor cable into the correct terminals. If a brake resistor
cable is used, connect its conductors into the correct terminals.
- Attach the grounding conductor of each cable to a grounding terminal with a grounding clamp for grounding con-
ductor.

5. To make a 360° connection with the grounding clamp for cable shield, expose the shield of motor cables.

e30bg104.20
1

1 Grounding clamp

2 Exposed shield

6. Attach the cable entry plate, and then the cable cover. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Tor-
ques for Cover Screws. Make sure that the control cables or the cables of the AC drive are not caught between the frame
and the cable cover.

Additional tightening torques:

- motor cable entry plate: 2.4 Nm
- control cable entry plate: 0.8 Nm
- DC cover: 2.4 Nm

68 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

7. Attach the grounding clamps for control cable on the grounding level with M4x16 screws. Use the clamps delivered in the
accessories bag. Use the clamps to ground the control cables. Connect the control cables.

e30bg074.10
1

Illustration 30: FR8/FI8

1 Standard

2 PROFIBUS

8. Attach the cover of the drive. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws.

6.5.5 Installing the Cables, FR9

Follow these instructions to install the cables.
For information on how to comply with the UL regulations in cable installations, see 6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling.
If it is necessary to connect an external brake resistor, see VACON® Brake Resistor Manual. See also 8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake
Resistor Connection.

Make sure that the delivery contains all necessary components.

Open the covers according to instructions in 6.4.6 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR9.
Procedure
1. Strip the motor cable, the mains cable, and the brake resistor cable. See 12.4 Cable Stripping Lengths
2. To move the cables through grommets, cut them open.
- Do not cut the grommet openings wider than what is necessary for the used cables.
- If the grommets fold in when putting the cable, pull the cable back to make the grommets straight.
- Cable gland can be used if preferred.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 69

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

e30bh277.10

Illustration 31: Cutting the Grommet in IP54


e30bh278.10

3. Attach the grommet and the cable until the frame of the drive goes into the groove of the grommet.

- With the protection rating IP54 (UL Type 12), the connection between the grommet and the cable must be tight. Pull
the first bit of the cable out of the grommet until it stays straight.
- If this is not possible, make the connection tight with some insulation tape or a cable tie.


e30bg077.10

4. Connect the cables. See the correct tightening torques in 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.

- Connect the phase conductors of the mains cable and of the motor cable into the correct terminals. If a brake resistor
cable is used, connect its conductors into the correct terminals.
- Attach the grounding conductor of each cable to a grounding terminal with a grounding clamp for grounding con-
ductor.

70 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

5. To make a 360° connection with the grounding clamp for cable shield, expose the shield of motor cables.

e30bg104.20
1

1 Grounding clamp

2 Exposed shield

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 71

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

6. Attach the grounding clamps for control cable on the grounding level with M4x16 screws. Use the clamps delivered in the
accessories bag. Use the clamps to ground the control cables. Connect the control cables.

e30bg074.10
1

Illustration 32: FR9

1 Standard

2 PROFIBUS

7. Attach the cable entry plate, and then the cable cover. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Tor-
ques for Cover Screws. Make sure that the control cables or the cables of the AC drive are not caught between the frame
and the cable cover.

6.5.6 Installing the Cables, FR10 Standalone

Follow these instructions to install the cables.
For information on how to comply with the UL regulations in cable installations, see 6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling.
If it is necessary to connect an external brake resistor, see VACON® Brake Resistor Manual. See also 8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake
Resistor Connection.

Make sure that the delivery contains all necessary components.

Open the covers according to instructions in 6.4.7 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR10 Standalone.
Procedure
1. To move the cables through grommets, cut them open.
- Do not cut the grommet openings wider than what is necessary for the used cables.
- If the grommets fold in when putting the cable, pull the cable back to make the grommets straight.
- Cable gland can be used if preferred.

72 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

e30bj239.10
2. Attach the grommet with screws to the cable clamp.

- With the protection rating IP54 (UL Type 12), the connection between the grommet and the cable must be tight. Pull
the first bit of the cable out of the grommet until it stays straight.
- If this is not possible, make the connection tight with some insulation tape or a cable tie.


e30bg077.10

3. To make a 360° connection with the grounding clamp for cable shield, expose the shield of motor cables.


e30bh781.10

4. Connect the cables. See the correct tightening torques in 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.
-

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 73

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

a. Connect the mains and motor cables. Use busbar to make the connection.

e30bh780.10
- b. Connect the control cables.

e30bh764.20
1

1 Control unit 3 Grounding

2 Cable routing 4 Cable entry

74 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

c. Attach the grounding conductor of each cable to a grounding terminal with a grounding clamp for grounding
conductor.

e30bh775.20
1

1 3

1 Motor cables 4 360° Grounding

2 PE/Grounding 5 Control cables

3 Mains cables

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 75

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

5. Attach the cable clamp.

e30bh778.10
6. Attach the safety covers. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws. Make sure
that the control cables or the cables of the AC drive are not caught between the frame and the safety covers.
7. Close the cabinet doors.

6.5.7 Installing the Cables, FR11 Standalone

Follow these instructions to install the cables.
For information on how to comply with the UL regulations in cable installations, see 6.1.2 UL Standards on Cabling.
If it is necessary to connect an external brake resistor, see VACON® Brake Resistor Manual. See also 8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake
Resistor Connection.

Make sure that the delivery contains all necessary components.

Open the covers according to instructions in 6.4.8 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR11 Standalone.
Procedure
1. To move the cables through grommets, cut them open.
- Do not cut the grommet openings wider than what is necessary for the used cables.
- If the grommets fold in when putting the cable, pull the cable back to make the grommets straight.
- Cable gland can be used if preferred.


e30bh278.10

76 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

2. Attach the grommet and the cable until the frame of the drive goes into the groove of the grommet.

e30bg077.10
3. To make a 360° connection with the grounding clamp for cable shield, expose the shield of motor cables.


e30bh781.10

4. Connect the cables. See the correct tightening torques in 12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals.
- a. Connect the mains and motor cables. Use the busbar to make the connection.


e30bh780.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 77

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

b. Connect the control cables.

e30bh765.20
1

1 Control unit 3 Grounding

2 Cable routing 4 Cable entry

78 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

c. Attach the grounding conductor of each cable to a grounding terminal with a grounding clamp for grounding
conductor.

e30bh776.20
1

3 3

3 5 1

Illustration 33: FR11 Standalone

1 Motor cables 4 360° grounding

2 PE/Grounding 5 Control cables

3 Mains cables

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 79

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

e30bh777.20
1

4
4

3 5 1

Illustration 34: FR11 Standalone, 0460–0502, 690 V

1 Motor cables 4 360° grounding

2 PE/Grounding 5 Control cables

3 Mains cables

80 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

5. Attach the cable clamp.

e30bh779.10
6. Attach the safety covers. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws. Make sure
that the control cables or the cables of the AC drive are not caught between the frame and the safety covers.
7. Close the cabinet doors.

6.6 Installation in an IT System

If mains is impedance-grounded (IT), the AC drive must have the EMC protection level C4. If the drive has the EMC protection level
C2, it is necessary to change it to C4. See instructions in:
• 6.6.1 Installing the AC drive in an IT System, FR4–FR6
• 6.6.2 Installing the AC Drive in an IT System, FR7
• 6.6.3 Installing the AC Drive in an IT System, FR8–FR11
For equivalents of EMC levels in VACON® AC drives, see 3.4 Description of the Type Code.

W A R N I N G
SHOCK HAZARD FROM THE COMPONENTS
The components of the drive are live when the drive is connected to mains.
- Do not make changes in the AC drive when it is connected to mains.

N O T I C E
DAMAGE TO THE AC DRIVE FROM INCORRECT EMC LEVEL
The EMC level requirements for the AC drive depend on the installation environment. An incorrect EMC level can damage the
drive.
- Before connecting the AC drive to the mains, make sure that the EMC level of the AC drive is correct for the mains.

6.6.1 Installing the AC drive in an IT System, FR4–FR6

Use these instructions to change the EMC protection of the AC drive to level C4.

Open the cover of the AC drive and remove the cable cover as instructed in 6.4.1 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR4/FI4,
6.4.2 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR5 or 6.4.3 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR6/FI6.

Related Links
• Description of the Type Code

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 81

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

Procedure
1. Remove the EMC screw(s).

e30bg094.10
FR4
Illustration 35: FR4

e30bg095.10

FR5
Illustration 36: FR5

82 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

e30bg096.10
FR6
Illustration 37: FR6

2. For FR4, remove the control unit.

There is a sticker next to the terminals to remind to remove the jumper X10-1 if the AC drive requires this. If there is no
sticker, move to step 4.


e30bg472.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 83

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

3. Remove the jumper X10-1.

e30bg473.10

4. Close the cover of the AC drive. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws.
5. After the change, put a check mark to "EMC Level modified" and write the date on the "product modified" label (see 4.4
Using the Product Modified Label). If the label is not yet attached, attach it on the drive near the nameplate.

6.6.2 Installing the AC Drive in an IT System, FR7

Use these instructions to change the EMC protection of the AC drive to level C4.

Open the cover and the cable cover of the AC drive as instructed in 6.4.4 Get Access and Locate the Terminals for FR7/FI7.
Procedure
1. Open the power unit cover of the AC drive.


e30bg097.10

84 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

2. Remove the EMC screws.

e30bg098.10
3. Remove the screw and replace with a plastic screw M4.

e30bg099.10

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 85

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Electrical Installation

4. Cut the leads of the 3 capacitors.

e30gb100.10
5. Remove the screw and the capacitor assembly.


e30bg101.10

6. Close the cover of the AC drive. For the tightening torques of the screws, see 12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws.
7. After the change, write "The EMC level was changed" and the date on the "product changed" label (see 4.4 Using the Prod-
uct Modified Label). If the label is not yet attached, attach it on the drive near the nameplate.

N O T I C E
Only an authorized VACON service person can change the EMC level of FR7 back to C2.
®

6.6.3 Installing the AC Drive in an IT System, FR8–FR11

Only a VACON® service person can change the EMC protection class of VACON® NXS/NXP, FR8–FR11.

86 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

7 Control Unit
7.1 Control Unit Components
The NXP control unit gives the flexibility to create advanced features with options and programmability. See selection guide and
application manual for full list of features.
The control unit of the AC drive contains the control board and additional boards (see Illustration 38) connected to the 5 slot con-
nectors (A to E) of the control board. The control board is connected to the power unit through a D-connector or fiber optic cables
(FR9–FR11).

e30bh782.10
3

2 4

5
1

Illustration 38: Basic and Option Slots on the Control Board

1 Slot A; OPTA1 4 Slot D; option boards

2 Slot B; OPTA2 5 Slot E; option boards

3 Slot C; option boards 6 Control terminals

The control unit of the delivered AC drive contains the standard control interface. If the order included special options, the AC drive
is delivered according to the order. The next pages contain information on the terminals and general wiring examples. The type
code shows the I/O boards that are installed at the factory. For more information on the option boards, see VACON® NX I/O Boards
User manual.
The OPTA1 basic board has 20 control terminals, and the relay board has 6 or 7. The standard connections of the control unit and
the descriptions of signals are shown in 7.3.2 Control Terminals on OPTA1.
For instructions on how to install the control unit that is not attached to the power unit, see VACON® NXP IP00 Drives Installation
Manual.

7.2 Control Voltage (+24 V/EXT +24 V)

It is possible to use the drive with an external power source with these properties: +24 V DC ±10%, minimum 1000 mA. Use it to
externally power up the control board, and the basic and option boards. The analog outputs and inputs at OPTA1 do not work with
only +24 V supplied to the control unit.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 87

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

Connect the external power source to one of the 2 bidirectional terminals (#6 or #12), see the option board manual or VACON® NX
I/O Boards User Manual. With this voltage, the control unit stays on and parameters can be set. The measurements of the main
circuit (for example, the DC-link voltage, and the unit temperature) are not available when the drive is not connected to mains.

N O T I C E
If the AC drive is supplied with external 24 V DC power, use a diode in terminal #6 (or #12) to prevent the current to flow in
opposite direction. Put a 1 A fuse in 24 V DC line for each AC drive. The maximum current consumption of each drive is 1 A from
the external supply.

e30bg012.10
-G1
Ext +24VDC
Power Supply

PE/GND
-F1

-F2 -F3 -F4 -F5 -F6 -F7

1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1A
gG/ gG/ gG/ gG/ gG/ gG/
Class CC Class CC Class CC Class CC Class CC Class CC

-Q1 -Q2 -Q3 -Q4 -Q5 -Q6

3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A
#6 #7 #6 #7 #6 #7 #6 #7 #6 #7 #6 #7

Illustration 39: Parallel Connection of 24 V Inputs with Many AC Drives

N O T I C E
The control unit I/O ground is not isolated from the chassis ground/protective earth. In the installation, consider the potential
differences between the grounding points. We recommend using galvanic isolation in the I/O and 24 V circuitry.

7.3 Control Unit Cabling

7.3.1 Selection of the Control Cables

The control cables must be a minimum of 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG) shielded multicore cables. See more on the cable types in Table 10. The
terminal wires must be a maximum of 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) for the terminals of the relay board and 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) for other termi-
nals.

Table 12: Tightening Torques of the Control Cables

The terminal The terminal screw The tightening torque in Nm (lb-in.)

Relay and thermistor terminals M3 0.5

(4.5)

Other terminals M2.6 0.2

(1.8)

7.3.2 Control Terminals on OPTA1

The figure shows the basic description of the terminals of the I/O board. For more information, see 7.3.2.2 Jumper Selections on the
OPTA1 Basic Board. For more information on control terminals, see VACON® All in One Application manual.

88 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

e30bg013.10
Reference potentiometer,
1-10kΩ Standard I/O board
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref Reference voltage Maximum current 10 mA
Selection V/mA with jumper block X1 (*)
Analogue input,
2 AI1+ 0...+10 V (Ri = 200 kΩ)
voltage or current (-10V...+10V Joystick ctrl, sel. with jumper)
0-20 mA (Ri =250 Ω)

3 GND/AI1- Analogue input common Differential input if not connected to ground

Allows ±20 V common mode voltage to GND
Analogue input, Selection V/mA with jumper block X1 (*)
4 AI2+ 0...+10 V (Ri = 200 kΩ)
voltage or current (-10V...+10V Joystick ctrl, sel. with jumper)
0-20 mA (Ri =250 Ω)

5 GND/AI2- Analogue input common Differential input if not connected to ground

Allows ±20 V common mode voltage to GND
±15%, max. 250 mA (all boards total)
6 +24V 24 V aux. voltage 150 mA (from single board)
Can also be used as external power back-up for
the control unit (and fieldbus)

7 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls

8 DIN1 Digital input 1
DIN2 Digital input 2 Ri = min. 5 kΩ
9
18-30 V = 1
10 DIN3 Digital input 3
11 CMA Common A for DIN1—DIN3 Digital inputs can be disconnected from ground (*)

12 +24V Control voltage output Same as terminal #6

13 GND I/O ground Same as terminal #7
14 DIN4 Digital input 4 Ri = min. 5 kΩ
15 DIN5 Digital input 5 18-30 V = 1

16 DIN6 Digital input 6

Must be connected to GND or 24 V of I/O term.
17 CMB Common B for DIN4-DIN6 or to ext.24 V or GND
Selection with jumper block X3 (*)
Output signal range: Current 0(4)-20 mA,
18 AO1+ Analogue signal (+output)
RL max 500 Ω or
Voltage 0-10 V, RL >1kΩ
19 AO1- Analogue output common Selection with jumper block X6 (*)

20 DO1 Open collector output Maximum Uin = 48 VDC

Maximum current = 50 mA

Illustration 40: Control Terminal Signals on OPTA1

*) See figure in 7.3.2.2 Jumper Selections on the OPTA1 Basic Board

Parameter references for I/O on control panel and NCDrive are: An.IN:A.1, An.IN:A.2, DigIN:A.1, DigIN:A.2, DigIN:A.3, DigIN:A.4, Dig-
IN:A.5, DigIN:A.6, AnOUT:A.1 and DigOUT:A.1.
To use the control voltage output +24 V/EXT+24 V:
• Wire the +24 V control voltage to digital inputs through an external switch. OR
• Use the control voltage to power up external equipment, such as encoders and auxiliary relays.
The specified total load on all available +24 V/EXT+24 V output terminals must not exceed 250 mA.
The maximum load on the +24 V/EXT+24 V output per board is 150 mA. If there is a +24 V/EXT+24 V output on the board, it is locally
short circuit protected. If one of the +24 V/ EXT+24 V outputs short circuits, the others remain powered because of the local protec-
tion.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 89

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

e30bg014.10
A

= C

Illustration 41: Maximum Loads on +24 V/EXT+24 V Output

A Maximum 150 mA C Maximum 250 mA

B +24 V out

7.3.2.1 Digital Input Signal Inversions

The active signal level is different when the common inputs CMA and CMB (terminals 11 and 17) are connected to +24 V or to
ground (0 V).
The 24 V control voltage and the ground for the digital inputs and the common inputs (CMA, CMB) can be internal or external.

e30bg015.10
A B

+24V GND

DIN1 DIN1

DIN2 DIN2

DIN3 DIN3

GND +24V
CMA CMA

Illustration 42: Positive/Negative Logic

A Positive logic (+24 V is the active signal) = the input is active when the switch is closed.

B Negative logic (0 V is the active signal) = the input is active when the switch is closed. Set the jumper X3 to the
position 'CMA/CMB isolated from ground'.

Related Links
• Jumper Selections on the OPTA1 Basic Board

90 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

7.3.2.2 Jumper Selections on the OPTA1 Basic Board

The functions of the AC drive can be changed to make them better agree with local requirements. To do it, change some positions
for the jumpers on the OPTA1 board. The positions of the jumpers set the signal type of analog and digital inputs. Changing the
AI/AO signal contents requires also a change in the related board parameter in menu M7.
On the A1 basic board, there are 4 jumper blocks: X1, X2, X3, and X6. Each jumper block contains 8 pins and 2 jumpers. See the
possible jumper selections in Illustration 43.

e30bg016.10
ABCD ABCD ABCD
X1 X2 X6
X6

X2

X1
X3

X3

Illustration 43: Jumper Blocks on OPTA1

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 91

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

e30bg017.10
Jumper block X1: Jumper block X2:
AI1 mode AI2 mode
A B C D A B C D

AI1 mode: 0...20mA; Current input AI1 mode: 0...20mA; Current input

A B C D A B C D

AI1 mode: Voltage input; 0...10V AI2 mode:Voltage input; 0...10V

A B C D A B C D

AI1 mode: Voltage input; 0...10V AI2 mode: Voltage input; 0...10V
differential differential
A B C D A B C D

AI1 mode: Voltage input; -0...10V AI2 mode: Voltage input; -10...10V

Jumper block X6: Jumper block X3:

AO1 mode CMA and CMB grounding
A B C D CMB connected to GND
CMA connected to GND

CMB isolated from GND

AO1 mode: 0....20mA; Current output CMA isolated from GND

CMB and CMA

A B C D internally connected together,
isolated from GND

AO1 mode: Voltage output; 0...10V = Factory default

Illustration 44: Jumper Selections for OPTA1

7.3.3 Control Terminals on OPTA2 and OPTA3

92 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

e30bg018.10
OPTA2

21 RO1/1 Switching capacity

Relay output 1 • 24 VDC/8 A
• 250 VAC/8 A
22 RO1/2 DigOUT:B.1 *) • 125 VDC/0.4 A
Minimum switching load
23 RO1/3 • 5 V/10 mA
Switching capacity
24 RO2/1 Relay output 2 • 24 VDC/8 A
• 250 VAC/8 A
25 RO2/2 DigOUT:B.2 *) • 125 VDC/0.4 A
Minimum switching load
26 RO2/3 • 5 V/10 mA

OPTA3

21 RO1/1 Switching capacity

Relay output 1 • 24 VDC/8 A
• 250 VAC/8 A
22 RO1/2 • 125 VDC/0.4 A
DigOUT:B.1 *) Minimum switching load
23 RO1/3 • 5 V/10 mA
Switching capacity
25 RO2/1 • 24 VDC/8 A
Relay output 2 • 250 VAC/8 A
• 125 VDC/0.4 A
RO2/2 Minimum switching load
26 DigOUT:B.2 *) • 5 V/10 mA

28 TI1+
Thermistor input
29 TI1- DigIN:B.1 *)

Illustration 45: Control Terminal Signals on Relay Boards OPTA2 and OPTA3

*) Parameter reference on control panel and NCDrive.

e30bg019.10

X1
21 22 23
24 25 26

X2

Illustration 46: OPTA2

e30bg020.10
21 22 23

X1
25 26 28 29

X2

X3

Illustration 47: OPTA3

7.4 Installation of Option Boards

For information on how to install the option boards, see the option board manual or VACON® NX I/O Boards User Manual.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 93

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Control Unit

7.5 Galvanic Isolation Barriers

The control connections are isolated from mains. The GND terminals are permanently connected to I/O ground. See Illustration 48.
The digital inputs on the I/O board are galvanically isolated from the I/O ground (PELV). The relay outputs are also double-isolated
from each other at 300 VAC (EN-50178).

e30bg021.20
10Vref Gate drivers
L1 L2 L3
GND
+24V
GND Control I/O
ground
AI1
AI2+
AI2-
Control
DIN1... Digital panel
DIN3 input
CMA group A
DIN4... Digital
DIN6 input
CMB group B
Control Power unit
AO1+ Analogue unit
AO2- output

DO1 Digital
output

RI1/1
RO1/2
RO1/3
RO2/1
RO2/2
RO2/3 U V W

TI1+
TI1-

Illustration 48: Galvanic Isolation Barriers

94 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8 Using the Control Panel

8.1 Navigating on the Control Panel
The data of the AC drive is in menus and submenus. Follow these instructions to navigate in the menu structure on the control
panel.

Procedure
1. To move between the menus, use the Browser buttons Up and Down on the keypad.
2. To go into a group or an item, push the Menu button Right.

To go back to the previous level, push the Menu button Left.

 The display shows the current location in the menu, for example S6.3.2. The display also shows the name of the
group or item in the current location.

e30bf980.10
RUN READY
A
Keypad

B
Monitor
C
V1 V1
Illustration 49: Navigation Items on the Control Panel

A The location on the menu C The number of items that are available or
the item value.
B The description (name of the page)

8.2 Using the Monitoring Menu (M1)

Follow these instructions to monitor the actual values of the parameters and signals.
The values cannot be changed in the Monitoring menu. To change the values of parameters, see 8.3.2 Selecting Values or 8.3.3
Editing the Values Digit by Digit.

Procedure
1. To find the Monitoring menu, scroll down in the main menu until the location indication M1 shows on the first line of the
display.


e30bg022.10

RUN READY

Keypad

Monitor
V1 V14
2. To go to the Monitoring menu from the main menu, push the Menu button Right.
3. To scroll through the menu, push the Browser buttons Up and Down.

8.2.1 Monitored Values

The monitored values have the indication V#.#. The values update each 0.3 s.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 95

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

Index Monitored value Unit ID Description

V1.1 Output frequency Hz 1 The output frequency to the motor

V1.2 Frequency reference Hz 25 The frequency reference to motor control

V1.3 Motor speed rpm 2 The actual speed of the motor in rpm

V1.4 Motor current A 3 Measured motor current

V1.5 Motor torque % 4 The calculated shaft torque

V1.6 Motor power % 5 The calculated motor shaft power in percentage

V1.7 Motor voltage V 6 The output voltage to the motor

V1.8 DC link voltage V 7 The measured voltage in the DC-link of the drive

V1.9 Unit temperature °C 8 The heat sink temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit

V1.10 Motor temperature % 9 The calculated motor temperature in percentage of the nominal temperature. See
VACON® All in One Application Manual.

V1.11 Analog input 1 V/mA 13 AI1(1)

V1.12 Analog input 2 V/mA 14 AI2(1)

V1.13 DIN 1, 2, 3 – 15 Shows the status of the digital inputs 1–3

V1.14 DIN 4, 5, 6 – 16 Shows the status of the digital inputs 4–6

V1.15 DO1, RO1, RO2 – 17 Shows the status of the digital and relay outputs 1–3

V1.16 Analog Iout mA 26 AO1

V1.17 Multimonitoring items – – Shows 3 monitored values to select from. See 8.7.6.9 Enabling/Disabling the
Change of Multimonitoring Items.

1 If the AC drive only has +24 V supply (for control board power-up), this value is not reliable.
See VACON® All in One Application Manual for more monitored values.

96 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.3 Using the Parameter Menu (M2)

8.3.1 Finding the Parameter

Use these instructions to find the parameter to edit.

Procedure
1. To find the Parameter menu, scroll down in the main menu until the location indication M2 shows on the first line of the
display.

e30bg023.10
READY

Keypad

Parameters
G1 G8
2. Push the Menu button Right to move into the Parameter Group Menu (G#).


e30bg024.10

READY

Keypad

Input signals
G1 G8
3. To find the parameter group, use the Browser buttons Up and Down.


e30bg025.10

READY

Keypad

Input signals
P1 P18
4. Use the Browser buttons Up and Down to find the parameter (P#) to edit. To move directly from the last parameter of a
parameter group to the first parameter of that group, push the Browser button Up.


e30bg026.10

READY

Keypad

Min Frequency
13.95 Hz

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 97

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.3.2 Selecting Values

Use these instructions to edit the text values on the control panel.
The basic application package "All in One+" includes 7 applications with different sets of parameters. For more information, see
VACON® All in One Application Manual.

When the drive is in RUN state, many parameters are locked, and cannot be edited. Only the text Locked shows on the display. Stop
the AC drive to edit these parameters.
Procedure
1. Use the Browser buttons Up and Down to find the parameter (P#) to edit. To move directly from the last parameter of a
parameter group to the first parameter of that group, push the Browser button Up.

e30bg026.10
READY

Keypad

Min Frequency
13.95 Hz
2. To go to the Edit mode, push the Menu button Right. The parameter value starts to blink.


e30bg028.10

READY

Keypad

Min Frequency
13.95 Hz
3. Set the new value with the Browser buttons Up and Down.
4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button or ignore the change with menu button Left.

 If the [enter] button is pushed, the value stops to blink and the new value shows in the value field.
e30bg029.10

READY

Keypad

Min Frequency
14.45 Hz
5. For locking the parameter values, use the Parameter Lock function in menu M6, see 8.7.6.6 Locking a Parameter.

8.3.3 Editing the Values Digit by Digit

Use these instructions to edit the numerical values on the control panel.
The basic application package "All in One+" includes 7 applications with different sets of parameters. For more information, see
VACON® All in One Application Manual.

When the drive is in RUN state, many parameters are locked, and cannot be edited. Only the text Locked shows on the display. Stop
the AC drive to edit these parameters.

98 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

Procedure
1. Find the parameter with the Browser and Menu buttons.

e30bg026.10
READY

Keypad

Min Frequency
13.95 Hz
2. To go to the Edit mode, push the Menu button Right. The parameter value starts to blink.

e30bg028.10
READY

Keypad

Min Frequency
13.95 Hz
3. Push the Menu button Right. The value can now be edited digit by digit.
4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button.

To ignore the change, push Menu button Left many times, until the view goes back to the parameter list.

 If the [enter] button is pushed, the value stops to blink and the new value shows in the value field.
e30bg029.10

READY

Keypad

Min Frequency
14.45 Hz
5. For locking the parameter values, use the Parameter Lock function in menu M6, see 8.7.6.6 Locking a Parameter.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 99

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.4 Using the Keypad Control Menu

8.4.1 Finding the Keypad Control Menu

In the Keypad control menu, the following functions are available: selecting the control mode, editing the frequency reference, and
changing the direction of the motor.

Procedure
1. To find the Keypad control menu, scroll down in the main menu until the location indication M3 shows on the first line of
the display.

e30bg033.10
STOP READY

I/O term

Keypad control
P1 P4
2. To go to the Keypad control menu from the main menu, push the Menu button Right.

8.4.2 Keypad Control Parameters M3

Index Parameter Min Max Unit Default Cust ID Description

P3.1 Control place 1 3 – 1 125 The control mode

1 = I/0 terminal
2 = Keypad (control panel)
3 = Fieldbus

R3.2 Keypad reference P2.1.1 P2.1.2 Hz 0.00 123 0 = Forward

1 = Reverse

P3.3 Direction (on keypad) 0 1 – 0 – –

P3.4 Stop button 0 1 – 1 114 0 = Limited function of Stop button

1 = Stop button always enabled

100 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.4.3 Changing the Control Mode

3 control modes are available to control the AC drive. For each control place, a different symbol shows on the display:

The control mode The symbol

I/O terminals
I/O term

Keypad (control panel)

Keypad

Fieldbus
Bus/Comm

Procedure
1. In the Keypad control menu (M3), find the control mode (Control Place) with Menu buttons Up and Down.

 STOP READY e30bg034.10

I/O term

Control Place
I/O Terminal
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 The parameter value starts to blink.

3. To scroll through the options, push the Browser buttons Up and Down.
4. To select the control mode, push the [enter] button.

8.4.4 Keypad Reference

The keypad reference submenu (P3.2) shows the frequency reference. In this submenu, also the frequency reference can be edited.

8.4.4.1 Editing the Frequency Reference

Use these instructions to change the frequency reference.

Procedure
1. In the Keypad control menu (M3), find the Keypad reference with Menu buttons Up and Down.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right. The frequency reference value starts to blink.
3. Set the new value with the Browser buttons.

 The value changes only on the control panel.

4. To make the motor speed to agree with the value on the control panel, select the keypad as the control mode, see 8.4.3
Changing the Control Mode.

8.4.5 Changing the Rotation Direction

The keypad direction submenu shows the rotation direction of the motor. In this submenu, also the rotation direction can be
changed.
For more information on how to control the motor with the control panel, see 3.8.2 Keypad and 9.2 Commissioning the AC Drive.

Procedure
1. In the Keypad control menu (M3), find the Keypad direction with the Menu buttons Up and Down.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 101

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

3. Select the direction with Menu buttons Up and Down.

 The rotation direction changes on the control panel.

4. To make the motor to agree with the set rotation direction, select the keypad as the control mode, see 8.4.3 Changing the
Control Mode.

8.4.6 Disabling the Stop Motor Function

As a default, the motor stops when the Stop button is pushed no matter what is the control mode. Use these instructions to disable
this function.

Procedure
1. In the Keypad control menu (M3), find the page 3.4. Stop button with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. To select Yes or No, use the Browser buttons.
4. Accept the selection with the [enter] button.

 When the Stop motor function is not active, the Stop button stops the motor only when the keypad is the control
mode.

8.4.7 Special Functions in Keypad Control Menu

8.4.7.1 Selecting the Keypad as the Control Mode

This is a special function only available in menu M3.

Make sure to be in the menu M3 and control mode is other than keypad.
Procedure
1. Do one of the following options:
- Keep the Start button pushed down for 3 s when the motor is in RUN state.
- Keep the Stop button pushed down for 3 s when the motor is stopped.

In other menu than M3, when the keypad is not the active control mode and the start button is pushed, an error message
Keypad Control NOT ACTIVE shows. In some applications this error message is not shown.

 The keypad is selected as the control mode and the current frequency reference and direction is copied to the con-
trol panel.

8.4.7.2 Copying the Frequency Reference Set to the Control Panel

These are special functions only available in menu M3.
Use these instructions to copy the frequency reference set from I/O or fieldbus to control panel.

Make sure to be in menu M3 and that the control mode is other than keypad.
Procedure
1. Keep the [enter] button pushed down for 3 s.

In other menu than M3, when the keypad is not the active control mode and the start button is pushed, an error message
Keypad Control NOT ACTIVE shows.

102 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.5 Using the Active Faults Menu (M4)

8.5.1 Finding the Active Faults Menu

The Active faults menu shows a list of active faults. When there are no active faults, the menu is empty.
For more information on the fault types and how to reset faults, see 11.1 General Information on Fault Tracing and 11.2 Resetting a
Fault. For the fault codes, possible causes and information on how to correct the fault, see the Faults and Alarms section.

Procedure
1. To find the Active faults menu, scroll down in the main menu until the location indication M4 shows on the first line of the
display.

e30bg035.10
READY

I/O term

Active faults
F0
2. To go to the Active faults menu from the main menu, push the Menu button Right.

 If there is a fault in the display, these symbols show:

e30bg036.10

STOP FAULT

I/O term

11 Output phase
F T1 T13
B

Illustration 50: Fault Symbols

A Fault symbol

B Fault type symbol

8.5.2 Examining the Fault Time Data Record

This menu shows some important data that was valid at the time of the fault. This helps to find the cause of the fault.

Procedure
1. Find the fault in Active faults menu or Fault history menu.
2. Push the Menu button Right.
3. Scroll the data T.1-T.16 with the Browser buttons.

8.5.3 Fault Time Data Record

The fault time data record shows some important data that was valid at the time of the fault. This helps to find the cause of the fault.
If real time is set on the AC drive, the data items T1 and T2 show as in column Real Time Data Record.
In some special cases, some of the fields can show other data than described in the table. If the value of a field differs significantly
from the expected value, this special usage can be the reason. Contact the nearest distributor to get help from the factory in under-
standing the data.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 103

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

Code Description Value Real Time Data Record

T.1 Counted operation days d yyyy-mm-dd

T.2 Counted operation hours hh:mm:ss (d) hh:mm:ss,sss

T.3 Output frequency Hz (hh:mm:ss) –

T.4 Motor current A –

T.5 Motor voltage V –

T.6 Motor power % –

T.7 Motor torque % –

T.8 DC voltage V –

T.9 Unit temperature °C –

T.10 Run status – –

T.11 Direction – –

T.12 Warnings – –

T.13 0-speed(1) – –

T.14 Subcode – –

T.15 Module – –

T.16 Submodule – –

1 Tells if the drive was at zero speed (< 0.01 Hz) when the fault showed.

8.6 Using the Fault History Menu (M5)

8.6.1 Fault History Menu (M5)

There is a maximum number of 30 faults in the Fault history. The information on each fault shows in the Fault time data record, see
8.5.3 Fault Time Data Record.
The value line of the main page (H1->H#) shows the number of faults in the fault history. The location indication tells in which order
the faults have shown. The newest fault has the indication H5.1, the second newest H5.2, and so on. If there are 30 faults in the
history, the next fault that shows removes the oldest one (H5.30) from the history.
See the different fault codes in the Faults and Alarms section.

8.6.2 Resetting the Fault History

The Fault History shows 30 latest faults at a time. Use these instructions to reset the history.

Procedure
1. To find the Fault history menu, scroll down in the main menu until the location indication M5 shows on the first line of the
display.
2. To go to the Fault history menu from the main menu, push the Menu button Right.

104 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

3. In the Fault history menu, push the [enter] button for 3 s.

 The symbol H# changes to 0.

8.7 Using the System Menu (M6)

8.7.1 Finding the System Menu

The System menu includes the general settings of the AC drive. These are, for example, application selection, parameter sets and
information about the hardware and software. The number of submenus and subpages shows as the symbol S# (or P#) on the value
line.

Procedure
1. To find the System menu, scroll down in the main menu until the location indication M6 shows on the first line of the dis-
play.
2. To go to the System menu from the main menu, push the Menu button Right.


e30bg037.10

READY

I/O term

System Menu
S1 S11

8.7.2 System Menu Functions

Table 13: System Menu Functions

Code Function Min Max Unit Default Cust Description

S6.1 Language selection – – – English The selection is different in

all the language packages

S6.2 Application selection – – – Basic applica- Basic application

tion Standard application
Local/Remote control appl.
Multi-Step application
PID Control application
Multi-Purpose Control
appl.
Pump and Fan Control
appl.

S6.3 Copy parameters – – – – –

S6.3.1 Parameter sets – – – – Store set 1

Load set 1
Store set 2
Load set 2
Load factory defaults

S6.3.2 Load up to keypad – – – – All parameters

S6.3.3 Load down from keypad – – – – All parameters

All but motor parameters

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 105

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

Code Function Min Max Unit Default Cust Description

Application parameters

P6.3.4 Parameter back-up – – – Yes Yes

No

S6.4 Compare parameters – – – – –

S6.4.1 Set1 – – – Not used –

S6.4.2 Set 2 – – – Not used –

S6.4.3 Factory settings – – – – –

S6.4.4 Keypad set – – – – –

S6.5 Security – – – – –

S6.5.1 Password – – – Not used 0 = Not used

P6.5.2 Parameter lock – – – Change Ena- Change Enabled

bled Change Disabled

S6.5.3 Start-up wizard – – – – No

Yes

S6.5.4 Multimonitoring items – – – – Change Enabled

Change Disabled

S6.6 Keypad settings – – – – –

P6.6.1 Default page – – – – –

P6.6.2 Default page/ Operating – – – – –

menu

P6.6.3 Timeout time 0 65535 s 30 –

P6.6.4 Contrast 0 31 – 18 –

P6.6.5 Backlight time Always 65535 min 10 –

S6.7 Hardware settings – – – – –

P6.7.1 Internal brake resistor – – – Connected Not connected

Connected

P6.7.2 Fan control – – – Continuous Continuous

Temperature
First start
Calc temp

P6.7.3 HMI acknowledg. timeout 200 5000 ms 200 –

106 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

Code Function Min Max Unit Default Cust Description

P6.7.4 HMI number of retries 1 10 – 5 –

P6.7.5 Sine filter – – – Connected Not connected

Connected

S6.8 System information – – – – –

S6.8.1 Total counters – – – – –

C6.8.1.1 MWh counter – – kWh – –

C6.8.1.2 Power On day counter – – – – –

C6.8.1.3 Power On hours counter – – hh:mm: ss – –

S6.8.2 Trip counters – – – – –

T6.8.2.1 MWh counter – – kWh – –

T6.8.2.2 Clear MWh trip counter – – – – –

T6.8.2.3 Operating days trip counter – – – – –

T6.8.2.4 Operating hours trip counter – – hh:mm: ss – –

T6.8.2.5 Clear operating time counter – – – – –

S6.8.3 Software info – – – – –

S6.8.3.1 Software package – – – – –

S6.8.3.2 System software version – – – – –

S6.8.3.4 System load – – – – –

S6.8.4 Applications – – – – –

S6.8.4.# Name of application – – – – –

D6.8.4.#. 1 Application ID – – – – –

D6.8.4.#. 2 Applications: Version – – – – –

D6.8.4.#. 3 Applications: Firmware inter- – – – – –

face

S6.8.5 Hardware – – – – –

I6.8.5.1 Info: Power unit type code – – – – –

I6.8.5.2 Info: Unit voltage – – – – –

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 107

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

Code Function Min Max Unit Default Cust Description

I6.8.5.3 Info: Brake chopper – – – – –

I6.8.5.4 Info: Brake resistor – – – – –

S6.8.6 Expander boards – – – – –

S6.8.7 Debug menu – – – – For Application program-

ming only. Speak to the
factory to get instructions.

8.7.3 Changing the Language

Use these instructions to change the language of the control panel. The possible languages are different in all language packages.

Procedure
1. In the System menu (M6), find the Language selection page (S6.1) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 The name of the language starts to blink.

3. To select the language for the control panel texts, use the Menu buttons Up and Down.
4. To accept the selection, push the [enter] button.

 The name of the languages stops to blink and all text information on the control panel shows in the selected lan-
guage.

8.7.4 Changing the Application

The application can be changed in the Application selection page (S6.2). When the application is changed, all parameters are reset.
For more information on the Application Package, see VACON® NX All in One Application Manual.

Procedure
1. In the System menu (M6), find the Application selection page (S6.2, Application) with the Browser buttons.
2. Push the Menu button Right.
3. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 The name of the application starts to blink.

4. Scroll through the applications with the Browser buttons and select a different application.
5. To accept the selection, push the [enter] button.

 The AC drive starts again and goes through the set-up.

6. When the display shows the question Copy parameters?, there are 2 options:

This question shows only if the parameter P6.3.4 Parameter back-up is set to Yes.

- To upload the parameters of the new application to the control panel, select Yes with the Browser buttons.
- To keep the parameters of the application that was last used in the control panel, select No with the Browser buttons.

8.7.5 Copy Parameters (S6.3)

Use this function to copy parameters from one AC drive to a different AC drive or to save parameter sets in the internal memory of
the AC drive.
Stop the AC drive before copying or downloading parameters.

108 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.5.1 Saving Parameter Sets (Parameter Sets S6.3.1)

Use this function to get the factory default values back or save 1–2 customized parameter sets. A parameter set includes all parame-
ters of the application.

Procedure
1. In the Copy parameters (S6.3) subpage, find the Parameter sets (S6.3.1) with the Browser buttons.
2. Push the Menu button Right.
3. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 The text LoadFactDef starts to blink.

4. There are 5 options to select from. Select the function with the Browser buttons.
- Select LoadFactDef to download again the factory default values.
- Select Store set 1 to save actual values of all parameters as set 1.
- Select Load set 1 to download the values in set 1 as the actual values.
- Select Store set 2 to save actual values of all parameters as set 2.
- Select Load set 2 to download the values in set 2 as the actual values.
5. To accept the selection, push the [enter] button.
6. Wait until OK shows on the display.

8.7.5.2 Uploading Parameters to Control Panel (Up To Keypad, S6.3.2)

Use this function to upload all parameter groups to the control panel when the AC drive is stopped.

Procedure
1. In the Copy parameters (S6.3) subpage, find the Up to keypad page (S6.3.2).
2. Push the Menu button Right.
3. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 All param. starts to blink.

4. To accept the selection, push the [enter] button.
5. Wait until OK shows on the display.

8.7.5.3 Downloading Parameters to Drive (Down From Keypad, S6.3.3)

Use this function to download 1 or all parameter groups from the control panel to an AC drive when the AC drive is stopped.

Procedure
1. In the Copy parameters (S6.3) subpage, find the Down from keypad page (S6.3.3).
2. Push the Menu button Right.
3. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
4. Use the Browser buttons to select 1 of these 3 options:
- All parameters (All param.)
- All parameters but the motor nominal value parameters (All. no motor)
- Application parameters
5. To accept the selection, push the [enter] button.
6. Wait until OK shows on the display.

8.7.5.4 Activating or Deactivating the Automatic Parameter Back-up (P6.3.4)

Use these instructions to activate or deactivate the parameter back-up.

When the application is changed, the parameters in the parameter settings on page S6.3.1 are deleted. To copy parameters from
one application to a different application, first upload them to the control panel.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 109

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

Procedure
1. In the Copy parameters (S6.3) subpage, find the Automatic parameter back-up page (S6.3.4).
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. There are 2 options:
- To activate the Automatic parameter back-up, select Yes with the Browser buttons.
- To deactivate the Automatic parameter back-up, select No with the Browser buttons.
When the Automatic parameter back-up is active, the control panel makes a copy of the parameters of the application. Each time a
parameter is changed, the keypad back-up is automatically updated.

8.7.5.5 Comparing the Parameters

Use the Parameter comparison submenu (S6.4, Param.Comparison) to compare the actual parameter values to the values of the cus-
tomized parameter sets and those uploaded to the control panel. The actual values can be compared to Set 1, Set 2, Factory Set-
tings, and Keypad Set.

Procedure
1. In the Copy parameters (S6.3) subpage, find the Comparing parameters submenu with the Browser buttons.
2. Push the Menu button Right.

 The actual parameter values are first compared to those of the customized parameter Set 1. If no differences are
found, 0 shows on the bottom line. If there are differences, the display shows the number of the differences (for
example, P1->P5 = 5 different values).
3. To compare the values to a different set, use the Browser buttons.
4. To go to the page with the parameter values, push the Menu button Right.

 In the display that opens, check the values on different lines:

e30bg027.10

READY

I/O term

A
P2.1.2=50.0
B 20.0 Hz
Illustration 51: Parameter Values in Parameter Comparison

A Value of the selected set

B Actual value

5. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 The actual value starts to blink.

6. To change the actual value, use the Browser buttons, or change the value digit by digit with the Menu button Right.

8.7.6 Security

8.7.6.1 Finding the Security Menu

The Security menu is password protected. Use it to handle passwords, start-up wizards, and multimonitoring items, and to lock pa-
rameters.

Procedure
1. To find the Security submenu, scroll down in the System menu until the location indication S6.5 shows on the first line of the
display.
2. To go to the Security submenu from the System menu, push the Menu button Right.

110 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.6.2 Passwords
To prevent unauthorized changes in the application selection, use the Password function (S6.5.1). By default, the password is not
active.

N O T I C E
Keep the password in a safe location!

8.7.6.3 Setting a Password

Set a password to protect the application selection menu.

N O T I C E
Keep the password in a safe location! The password cannot be changed if a valid password is not available.

Procedure
1. In Security submenu, push the Menu button Right.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 The display shows 0 that blinks.

3. There are 2 options to set a password: with the Browser buttons or by digits. The password can be a number between 1 and
65535.
- With the Browser buttons: Push the Browser buttons Up and Down to find a number.
- By digits: Push the Menu button Right. A second 0 shows on the display.
Push the Browser buttons to set digit on the right.
Push the Menu button Left, and set the digit on the left.
To add a third digit, push the Menu button Left. Set up to 5 digits with Menu and Browser buttons and set the digit
for each one with the Browser buttons.
4. To accept the new password, push the [enter] button.
The password activates after the Timeout time (P6.6.3) (see 8.7.7.4 Setting the Timeout Time).

8.7.6.4 Entering a Password

In a password-protected submenu, the display shows Password? Use these instructions to enter the password.

Procedure
1. When the display shows Password?, give the password with the Browser buttons.

8.7.6.5 Deactivating the Password Function

Use these instructions to deactivate the password protection for application selection menu.

Procedure
1. Find the Password (S6.5.1) in the Security menu with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. Set value 0 for the password.

8.7.6.6 Locking a Parameter

Use the Parameter lock function to prevent changes to the parameters. If the parameter lock is active, the text locked shows on the
display when trying to edit a parameter value.

N O T I C E
This function does not prevent unauthorized changes of parameter values.

Procedure
1. In the Security menu (M6), find the Parameter lock (P6.5.2) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 111

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

3. To change the parameter lock status, use the Browser buttons.

4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button.

8.7.6.7 Start-up Wizard (P6.5.3)

The start-up wizard helps in the commissioning of the AC drive. By default, the start-up wizard is active.
In the start-up wizard, this information is set:
• the language
• the application
• the values for a set of parameters that are same to all applications
• the values for a set of application-specific parameters.
The table lists the functions of the keypad buttons in the start-up wizard.

Action Button

Accepting a value [enter] button

Scrolling for options Browser buttons Up and Down

Changing a value Browser buttons Up and Down

8.7.6.8 Activating/Deactivating the Start-up Wizard

Use these instructions to activate or deactivate the Start-up Wizard function.

Procedure
1. In the System menu (M6), find the page P6.5.3.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. Select the action:
- To activate the start-up wizard, select Yes with the Browser buttons.
- To deactivate the start-up wizard, select No with the Browser buttons.
4. To accept the selection, push the [enter] button.

8.7.6.9 Enabling/Disabling the Change of Multimonitoring Items

Use Multimonitoring to monitor up to 3 actual values at the same time (see 8.2 Using the Monitoring Menu (M1) and the chapter
Monitored values in the Application Manual of your application).
Use these instructions to enable the change when changing the values that are monitored with other values.

Procedure
1. In the Security submenu, find Multimonitoring items page (P6.5.4, Multimon. items) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 Change Enabled starts to blink.

3. Use Browser buttons Up and Down to select Change Enabled or Change Disabled.
4. Accept the selection with the [enter] button.

112 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.7 Keypad Settings

8.7.7.1 Finding the Keypad Settings Menu

Use the Keypad settings submenu in the System menu for making changes in the control panel.
In the submenu, there are 5 pages (P#) that control the panel operation:
• Default page (P6.6.1)
• Default page/Operating menu (P6.6.2)
• Timeout time (P6.6.3)
• Contrast adjustment (P6.6.4)
• Backlight time (P6.6.5)

Procedure
1. In the System menu (M6), find the Keypad settings submenu (S6.6) with the Browser buttons.

8.7.7.2 Changing the Default Page

Use the Default page to set the location (page) to which the display automatically moves after the Timeout time or after the panel is
set on.
For more information on the timeout time, see 8.7.7.4 Setting the Timeout Time.
If the Default Page value is 0, the function is not activated. When the Default page is not used, the control panel shows the page
that was last showed on the display.

Procedure
1. In the Keypad settings submenu, find the Default page subpage (P6.6.1) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. To change the number of the main menu, use the Browser buttons.
4. To edit the number of the submenu/page, push the Menu button Right. Change the number of the submenu/page with
the Browser buttons.
5. To edit the third level page number, push the Menu button Right. Change the number of the third level page with the
Browser buttons.
6. To accept the new default page value, push the [enter] button.

8.7.7.3 Default Page in the Operating Menu (P6.6.2)

Use this submenu to set the default page in the Operating menu. The display automatically moves to the set page after the Timeout
time (see 8.7.7.4 Setting the Timeout Time) or after the control panel is set on. For instructions, see 8.7.7.2 Changing the Default
Page.
The Operating menu is only available in special applications.

8.7.7.4 Setting the Timeout Time

The Timeout time sets the time after which the control panel display goes back to the Default page (P6.6.1), see 8.7.7.2 Changing the
Default Page.
If the Default page value is 0, the Timeout time setting has no effect.

Procedure
1. In the Keypad settings submenu, find the Timeout time subpage (P6.6.3) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the Edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. To set the timeout time, use the Browser buttons.
4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button.

8.7.7.5 Contrast Adjustment (P6.6.4)

If the display is not clear, adjust its contrast with the same procedure as the one for the timeout time setting, see 8.7.7.4 Setting the
Timeout Time.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 113

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.7.6 Backlight Time (P6.6.5)

It is possible to set the time that the backlight stays on until it goes off. Select a value between 1 and 65535 minutes or Forever. For
instructions on how to change the value, see 8.7.7.4 Setting the Timeout Time.

8.7.8 Hardware Settings

8.7.8.1 Finding the Hardware Setting Menu

Use the Hardware settings submenu (S6.7, HW settings) in the System menu to control these functions of the hardware in the AC
drive:
• Internal brake resistor connection, InternBrakeRes
• Fan control
• HMI acknowledge timeout, HMI ACK timeout
• HMI retry
• Sine filter
• Pre-charge mode.

Use a password to go the Hardware settings submenu, see 8.7.6.2 Passwords.

Procedure
1. To find the Hardware settings submenu, scroll down in the System menu until the location indication S6.7 shows on the first
line of the display.
2. To go to the Hardware settings submenu from the System menu, push the Menu button Right.

8.7.8.2 Setting the Internal Brake Resistor Connection

Use this function to tell the AC drive if the internal brake resistor is connected or not.
If the AC drive has an internal brake resistor, the default value of this parameter is Connected. We recommend changing this value to
Not conn. if:
• it is necessary to install an external brake resistor to increase the braking capacity
• the internal brake resistor is disconnected for some reason.

The brake resistor is available as optional equipment for all sizes. It can be installed internally in enclosure sizes FR4 to FR6.
Procedure
1. In the Hardware settings submenu, find the Internal brake resistor connection (P6.7.1) subpage with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. To change the internal brake resistor status, use the Browser buttons.
4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button.

8.7.8.3 Fan Control

Use this function to control the cooling fan of the AC drive. There are 4 options to select from:
• Continuous (default setting). The fan is always on when the power is on.
• Temperature. The fan starts automatically when the heat sink temperature goes to 60 °C (140 °F) or when the AC drive operates.
The fan stops about a minute after one of the following:
- the heat sink temperature falls to 55 °C (131 °F)
- the AC drive stops
- the fan control value is changed from Continuous to Temperature
• First start. When power is on, the fan is in the stop state. When the AC drive gets the first start command, the fan starts.
• Calc temp. The fan function agrees to the calculated IGBT temperature:
- If the IGBT temperature is more than 40 °C (104 °F), the fan starts.
- If the IGBT temperature is below 30 °C (86 °F), the fan stops.
As the default temperature at power-up is 25 °C (77 °F), the fan does not start immediately.
For instructions, see 8.7.8.4 Changing the Fan Control Settings.

114 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.8.4 Changing the Fan Control Settings

Use these instructions to change the Fan Control Settings.

Procedure
1. In the Hardware settings submenu, find the Fan control settings (P6.7.2) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.

 The parameter value starts to blink.

3. To select the fan mode, use the Browser buttons.
4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button.

8.7.8.5 HMI Acknowledge Timeout (P6.7.3)

Use this function to change the timeout of the HMI acknowledgement time. Use this function when there is more delay in the RS232
transmission, for example, when internet connection is used for communication over longer distances.
If the AC drive is connected to the PC with a cable, do not change the default values of parameters P6.7.3 and P6.7.4 (200 and 5).
If the AC drive is connected to the PC with an internet connection and the messages are transferred with a delay, set the values for
parameter P6.7.3 to agree these delays.
For instructions, see 8.7.8.6 Changing the HMI Acknowledge Timeout.
Example
For example, if the transfer delay between the AC drive and the PC is 600 ms, make these settings:
• Set the value of parameter P6.7.3 to 1200 ms (2 x 600, sending delay + receiving delay)
• Set the [Misc]-part of the file NCDrive.ini to agree with the settings:
- Retries = 5
- AckTimeOut = 1200
- TimeOut = 6000
Do not use intervals shorter than the AckTimeOut-time in the NC-Drive monitoring.

8.7.8.6 Changing the HMI Acknowledge Timeout

Use these instructions to change the HMI Acknowledge Timeout.

Procedure
1. In the Hardware settings submenu, find the HMI acknowledgement time (HMI ACK timeout) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
3. To change the acknowledgement time, use the Browser buttons.
4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button.

8.7.8.7 Changing the Number of Retries to Receive HMI Acknowledgement (P6.7.4)

Use this parameter to set the number of times the AC drive tries to receive acknowledgement if it does not receive it during the
acknowledgement time (P6.7.3) or if the received acknowledgement is defective.

Procedure
1. In the Hardware settings submenu, find the Number of retries to receive HMI acknowledgement (P6.7.4) with the Browser
buttons.
2. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right. The value starts to blink.
3. To change the number of retries, use the Browser buttons.
4. To accept the change, push the [enter] button.

8.7.8.8 Sine Filter (P6.7.5)

When using an old motor or a motor that was not made to be used with an AC drive, it can be necessary to use a sine filter. A sine
filter makes the sine form of the voltage better than a dU/dt filter.
If a sine filter is used in the AC drive, set this parameter to Connected to put it into operation.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 115

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.8.9 Pre-charge Mode (P6.7.6)

For an FI9 or a larger inverter unit, select Ext.ChSwitch to control an external charge switch.

8.7.9 System Info

8.7.9.1 Finding the System Info Menu

The System info submenu (S6.8) contains information on the hardware, software, and operation of the AC drive.

Procedure
1. To find the System info submenu, scroll down in the System menu until the location indication S6.8 shows on the first line of
the display.
2. To go to the System info submenu from the System menu, push the Menu button Right.

8.7.9.2 Total Counters (S6.8.1)

The Total counters page (S6.8.1) has information on the AC drive operation times. The counters show the total number of MWh,
operation days, and operation hours. The Total counters cannot be reset.
The Power On time counter (days and hours) always counts, when the AC power is on. The counter does not count when control
unit runs on +24 V only.

Table 14: Total Counters

Page Counter Example

C6.8.1.1. MWh counter

C6.8.1.2. Power On day counter Value on display is 1.013. The drive has operated for 1 year and 13 days.

C6.8.1.3 Power On hour counter Value on display is 7:05:16. The drive has operated for 7 hours 5 minutes and 16 s.

8.7.9.3 Trip Counters (S6.8.2)

The Trip counters page (S6.8.2) has information on resettable counters, that is, counters, for which the value can be set back to 0. The
trip counters count only when the motor is in RUN state.

Table 15: Trip Counters

Page Counter Example

T6.8.2.1 MWh counter –

T6.8.2.3 Operation day counter Value on display is 1.013. The drive has operated for 1 year and 13 days.

T6.8.2.4 Operation hour counter Value on display is 7:05:16. The drive has operated for 7 hours 5 minutes and 16 s.

8.7.9.4 Resetting the Trip Counters

Use these instructions to reset the trip counters.

Procedure
1. In the System info submenu, find the Trip counters page (6.8.2) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the Clear MWh counter page (6.8.2.2, Clr MWh cntr) or to the Clear Operation time counter page (6.8.2.5, Clr Optime
cntr), use the Menu button Right.
3. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right.
4. To select Reset, push Browser buttons Up and Down.
5. To accept the selection, push the [enter] button.
6. The display shows again Not reset.

116 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.9.5 Software (S6.8.3)

The Software information page includes information on the AC drive software.

Page Content

6.8.3.1 Software package

6.8.3.2 System software version

6.8.3.3 Firmware interface

6.8.3.4 System load

8.7.9.6 Applications (S6.8.4)

The Applications submenu (S6.8.4) contains information on all applications on the AC drive.

Page Content

6.8.4.# Name of application

6.8.4.#.1 Application ID

6.8.4.#.2 Version

6.8.4.#.3 Firmware interface

8.7.9.7 Examining the Application Page

Use these instructions to examine the Applications pages.

Procedure
1. In the System info submenu, find the Applications page with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the Applications page, push the Menu button Right.
3. To select the application, use the Browser buttons. There are as many pages as there are applications on the AC drive.
4. To go to the Information pages, use the Menu button Right.
5. To see the different pages, use the Browser buttons.

8.7.9.8 Hardware (S6.8.5)

The Hardware information page includes information on the AC drive hardware.

Page Content

6.8.5.1 Power unit type code

6.8.5.2 Nominal voltage of the unit

6.8.5.3 Brake chopper

6.8.5.4 Brake resistor

6.8.5.5 Serial number

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 117

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.7.9.9 Checking the Status of an Option Board

The Expander boards pages give information about the basic and option boards connected to the control board. See 7.1 Control
Unit Components for more information on the boards.
For more information on the parameters of the option boards, see 8.8.1 Expander Board Menu.

Procedure
1. In the System info submenu, find the Expander boards page (6.8.6) with the Browser buttons.
2. To go to the Expander boards page, push the Menu button Right.
3. To select the board, use the Browser buttons.

 If no board is connected to the slot, the display shows no board.

If a board is connected to a slot but there is no connection, the display shows no conn..
4. To see the status of the board, push the Menu button Right.
5. To see the program version of the board, push the Browser button Up or Down.

8.7.9.10 Debug Menu (S6.8.7)

The Debug menu is for advanced users and application designers. Speak to the factory to get instructions, if it is necessary.

8.8 Using the Expander Board Menu

8.8.1 Expander Board Menu

The Expander board menu, that is, the menu for option board information, allows to:
• see which option boards are connected to the control board
• find and edit the option board parameters.

Table 16: Option Board Parameters (Board OPTA1)

Page Parameter Min Max Default Cust Selections

P7.1.1.1 AI1 mode 1 5 3 1 = 0–20 mA

2 = 4–20 mA
3 = 0–10 V
4 = 2–10 V
5 = –10…+10 V

P7.1.1.2 AI2 mode 1 5 1 See P7.1.1.1

P7.1.1.3 AO1 mode 1 4 1 1 = 0–20 mA

2 = 4–20 mA
3 = 0–10 V
4 = 2–10 V

8.8.2 Examining the Connected Option Boards

Use these instructions to examine the connected option boards.

Procedure
1. To find the Expander board menu, scroll down in the main menu until the location indication M7 shows on the first line of
the display.
2. To go to the Expander board menu from the main menu, push the Menu button Right.
3. To examine the list of connected option boards, use the Browser buttons Up and Down.
4. To see the information on the option board, push the Menu button Right.

118 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Using the Control Panel

8.8.3 Finding the Option Board Parameters

Use these instructions to check the values of the option board parameters.

Procedure
1. Find the option board with the Browser and Menu buttons in the Expander Board Menu.
2. To see the information on the option board, push the Menu button Right. For instructions on how to examine the connec-
ted option boards, see 8.8.2 Examining the Connected Option Boards.
3. To scroll to the Parameters use the Browser buttons Up and Down.
4. To examine the parameter list, push the Menu button Right.
5. To scroll through the parameters, use the Browser buttons Up and Down.
6. To go to the edit mode, push the Menu button Right. For instructions on how to edit the parameter values, see 8.3.2 Select-
ing Values and 8.3.3 Editing the Values Digit by Digit.

8.9 Further Control Panel Functions

The VACON® NX control panel has more application-related functions. See VACON® NX Application Package for more information.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 119

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Commissioning

9 Commissioning
9.1 Safety Checks before Starting the Commissioning
Before starting the commissioning, read these warnings.

D A N G E R
SHOCK HAZARD FROM POWER UNIT COMPONENTS
The power unit components are live when the drive is connected to mains. A contact with this voltage can lead to death or seri-
ous injury.
- Do not touch the components of the power unit when the drive is connected to mains. Before connecting the drive to mains,
make sure that the covers of the drive are closed.

D A N G E R
SHOCK HAZARD FROM TERMINALS
The motor terminals U, V, W, the brake resistor terminals, or the DC terminals are live when the drive is connected to mains, also
when the motor does not operate. A contact with this voltage can lead to death or serious injury.
- Do not touch the motor terminals U, V, W, the brake resistor terminals, or the DC terminals when the drive is connected to
mains. Before connecting the drive to mains, make sure that the covers of the drive are closed.

D A N G E R
SHOCK HAZARD FROM DC LINK OR EXTERNAL SOURCE
The terminal connections and the components of the drive can be live 5 minutes after the drive is disconnected from the mains
and the motor has stopped. Also the load side of the drive can generate voltage. A contact with this voltage can lead to death or
serious injury.
- Before doing electrical work on the drive:
Disconnect the drive from the mains and make sure that the motor has stopped.
Lock out and tag out the power source to the drive.
Make sure that no external source generates unintended voltage during work.
Wait 5 minutes before opening the cabinet door or the cover of the AC drive.
Use a measuring device to make sure that there is no voltage.

W A R N I N G
SHOCK HAZARD FROM CONTROL TERMINALS
The control terminals can have a dangerous voltage also when the drive is disconnected from mains. A contact with this voltage
can lead to injury.
- Make sure that there is no voltage in the control terminals before touching the control terminals.

C A U T I O N
BURNING HAZARD FROM HOT SURFACES
The surface of the side of the AC drive FR8 is hot.
- Do not touch the side of the AC drive FR8 with hands when it operates.

C A U T I O N
FIRE HAZARD FROM HOT SURFACES
When the AC drive FR6 operates, the rear surface of the drive is hot, and can cause fire on the surface it is installed on.
- Do not install the AC drive FR6 on a surface that is not fireproof.

120 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Commissioning

9.2 Commissioning the AC Drive

Follow these instructions to commission the AC drive.

Read the safety instructions in 2.2 Danger and Warnings and 9.1 Safety Checks before Starting the Commissioning and obey them.
Procedure
1. Make sure that the motor is installed correctly.
2. Make sure that the motor is not connected to mains.
3. Make sure that the AC drive and the motor are grounded.
4. Make sure to select the mains cable, the brake cable, and the motor cable correctly.

For information on cable selections, see:

- 6.1.3 Cable Selection and Dimensioning and related tables
- 6.1 Cable Connections
- 6.2 EMC-compliant Installation

5. Make sure that the control cables are sufficiently far from the power cables. See 6.5.1 Additional Instructions for Cable In-
stallation
6. Make sure that the shields of the shielded cables are connected to a grounding terminal that is identified with the ground-
ing symbol.
7. Do a check of the tightening torques of all the terminals.
8. Make sure that no power correction capacitors are connected to the motor cable.
9. Make sure that the cables do not touch the electrical components of the drive.
10. Make sure that the common input +24 V is connected to an external power source and the ground of the digital input is
connected to ground of the control terminal.
11. Do a check of the quality and quantity of the cooling air.

For further information on cooling requirements, see:

- 5.2.1 General Cooling Requirements
- 5.2.2 Cooling of FR4 to FR9
- 5.2.3 Cooling of Standalone AC drives (FR10 to FR11)
- 12.8 VACON® NXP Technical Data

12. Make sure that there is no condensation on the surfaces of the AC drive.
13. Make sure that there are no unwanted objects in the installation space.
14. Before connecting the drive to mains, do a check of the installation and the condition of all the fuses (see 12.3.1 List of
Cable and Fuse Size Information) and other protective devices.

9.3 Measuring the Cable and Motor Insulation

Do these checks if necessary.
NOTE! AC drive is already measured at the factory.
• The insulation checks of the motor cable, see 9.3.1 Insulation Checks of the Motor Cable
• The insulation checks of the mains cable, see 9.3.2 Insulation Checks of the Mains Cable
• The insulation checks of the motor, see 9.3.3 Insulation Checks of the Motor

9.3.1 Insulation Checks of the Motor Cable

Use these instructions to check the insulation of the motor cable.

Procedure
1. Disconnect the motor cable from the terminals U, V, and W and from the motor.
2. Measure the insulation resistance of the motor cable between phase conductors 1 and 2, between phase conductors 1 and
3, and between phase conductors 2 and 3.
3. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the grounding conductor.
4. The insulation resistance must be >1 MΩ at the ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 121

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Commissioning

9.3.2 Insulation Checks of the Mains Cable

Use these instructions to check the insulation of the mains cable.

Procedure
1. Disconnect the mains cable from the terminals L1, L2, and L3 and from mains.
2. Measure the insulation resistance of the mains cable between phase conductors 1 and 2, between phase conductors 1 and
3, and between phase conductors 2 and 3.
3. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the grounding conductor.
4. The insulation resistance must be >1 MΩ at the ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).

9.3.3 Insulation Checks of the Motor

Use these instructions to check the insulation of the motor.

N O T I C E
Obey the instructions of the motor manufacturer.

Procedure
1. Disconnect the motor cable from the motor.
2. Open the bridging connections in the motor connection box.
3. Measure the insulation resistance of each motor winding. The voltage must be the same or higher than the motor nominal
voltage, but at least 1000 V.
4. The insulation resistance must be >1 MΩ at the ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
5. Connect the motor cables to the motor.
6. Do the final insulation check on the drive side. Put all phases together and measure to the ground.
7. Connect the motor cables to the drive.

9.4 Checks after Commissioning

9.4.1 Testing the AC Drive after Commissioning

Before starting the motor, do these checks.

• Before the tests, make sure that it is safe to do each test.

• Make sure that the other workers near know about the tests.
Procedure
1. Make sure that all the START and STOP switches that are connected to the control terminals are in the STOP position.
2. Make sure that the motor can be started safely.
3. Set the parameters of group 1 (see VACON® All in One Application Manual) to agree with the requirements of the used
application. To find the necessary values for the parameters, see the motor nameplate.
Set these parameters at a minimum:
- Motor nominal voltage
- Motor nominal frequency
- Motor nominal speed
- Motor nominal current
- Motor cos phi

4. Set the maximum frequency reference (that is, the maximum speed of the motor) to agree with the motor and the device
that is connected to the motor.
5. Do the following tests in this order:
- a. RUN test without the load, see 9.4.2 RUN Test without Load
- b. Start-up test, see 9.4.3 Start-up Test
- c. Identification run, see 9.4.4 Identification Run

122 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Commissioning

9.4.2 RUN Test without Load

Do either Test A or Test B.
• Test A: Controls from the control terminals
• Test B: Control from the control panel

9.4.2.1 Test A: Controls from the Control Terminals

Do this RUN test when the control mode is I/O terminals.

Procedure
1. Turn the Start/Stop switch to ON position.
2. Change the frequency reference (potentiometer).
3. Do a check in the Monitoring menu M1 that the value of output frequency changes the equivalent quantity to the frequen-
cy reference.
4. Turn the Start/Stop switch to OFF position.

9.4.2.2 Test B: Control from the Keypad

Do this RUN test when the control mode is keypad.

Procedure
1. Change the control from the control terminals to the keypad. For the instructions, see 8.4.3 Changing the Control Mode.
2. Push the Start button on the control panel.
3. Go to the Keypad control menu (M3) and Keypad Reference submenu (see 8.4.4 Keypad Reference). To change the frequency
reference, use the Browser buttons.
4. Do a check in the Monitoring menu M1 that the value of output frequency changes the equivalent quantity to the frequen-
cy reference.
5. Push the Stop button on the control panel.

9.4.3 Start-up Test

Do the start-up tests without the load, if possible. If this is not possible, make sure that it is safe to do each test before doing it. Make
sure that the other workers near know about the tests.

Procedure
1. Make sure that all Start/Stop switches are in Stop positions.
2. Turn the mains switch ON.
3. Check the rotation direction of the motor.
4. If close loop control is used, make sure that the encoder frequency and direction are the same as the motor direction and
frequency.
5. Do again the Run test A or B, see 9.4.2 RUN Test without Load.
6. If the motor was not connected in the start-up test, connect the motor to the process.
7. Make the identification run without the motor running. If close loop control is used, make the identification run with the
motor running. See 9.4.4 Identification Run.

9.4.4 Identification Run

The Identification Run helps to tune the motor and the drive-related parameters. It is a tool to be used in commissioning to find the
best possible parameter values for most drives. The automatic motor identification calculates or measures the necessary motor pa-
rameters for the best possible motor and speed control. For more information on the Identification Run, see VACON® All in One
Application Manual, parameter ID631.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 123

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Maintenance

10 Maintenance
10.1 Preventive Maintenance Recommendations
Generally, all technical equipment, including Danfoss AC Drives need a minimum level of preventive maintenance. Regular mainte-
nance is recommended to ensure trouble-free operation and long life of the drive. It is also recommended, as a good service prac-
tice to record a maintenance log with counter values, date, and time describing the maintenance and service actions.
Danfoss recommends the following inspections and service intervals for VACON® NXP family drive/system.
NOTE: The service schedule for part replacements may vary depending on operation conditions. Under specific conditions, the com-
bination of stressful operating and environment conditions work together to significantly reduce the lifetime of the components.
These conditions can include, for example, extreme temperature, dust, high humidity, hours of use, corrosive environment, and
loading.
For operation in stressful conditions, Danfoss offers the DrivePro® Preventive Maintenance service. DrivePro® services extend the
lifetime and increase the performance of the product with scheduled maintenance including customized part replacements. Drive-
Pro® services are tailored to your application and operating conditions.

Table 17: Maintenance Schedule for Air-cooled Drives

Component Inspec- Service Preventive maintenance actions

tion in- sched-
terval(1) ule(2)

Installation

Visual drive in- 1 year – Check for the unusual, for example, for signs of overheating, aging, corrosion, and for
spection dusty and damaged components.

Auxiliary 1 year Accord- Inspect equipment, switchgear, relays, disconnects or fuses/circuit breakers. Examine
equipment ing to the operation and condition for possible causes of operational faults or defects. The
manufac- continuity check on fuses is performed by trained service personnel.
turer rec-
ommen-
dations

EMC consider- 1 year – Inspect the installation wiring regarding the electromagnetic capability and the sepa-
ation ration distance between control wiring and power cables.

Cable routing 1 year – Check for parallel routing of motor cables, mains wiring, and signal wiring. Parallel
routing must be avoided. Avoid routing cables through free air without support.
Check for aging and wearing of the cable insulation.

Control wiring 1 year – Check for tightness, damaged or crimped wires or ribbon wires. The connections
should be terminated correctly with solid crimped ends. The use of screened cables
and earthed EMC plate, or a twisted pair is recommended.

Proper clearan- 1 year – Check that the required external clearances for proper airflow for cooling are followed
ces according to the frame designation and drive type of the drive. For clearances, refer to
the local design regulations.

Seals condition 1 year – Check that the seals of the enclosure, the covers, and the cabinet doors are in good
condition.

Corrosive envi- 1 year – Conductive dust and aggressive gases, such as sulphide, chloride, salt mist, and so on,
ronments can damage the electrical and mechanical components. Air filters will not remove air-
borne corrosive chemicals. Act based on findings.

Drive

Programming 1 year – Check that the AC drive parameter settings are correct according to the motor, drive
application, and I/O configuration. Only trained service personnel may perform this ac-
tion.

Control panel 1 year – Check that the display pixels are intact. Check the event log for warnings, alarms, and
faults. Repetitive events are a sign of potential issues. Contact your local service center.

124 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Maintenance

Component Inspec- Service Preventive maintenance actions

tion in- sched-
terval(1) ule(2)

Drive Cooling 1 year – Check for blockages or constrictions in the air passages of the cooling channel. The
capacity heat sinks must be free of dust and condensation.

Capacitors, DC 1 year 8–15+ The expected lifetime of the capacitors is dependent on the loading profile of the ap-
link years plication and the environmental temperature. For applications with heavy loads in de-
manding environments or high ripple current, replace electrolytic capacitors every 8
years. If within specification of the drive type, replace every 10–15+ years. Only trained
service personnel may perform this action.

Cleaning and 1 year – The interior of the enclosure should be cleaned annually, and more frequently if nec-
Filters essary. The level of dust in the filter or inside the enclosure is an indicator for when the
next cleaning or filter replacement is required.

Fans 1 year 5–10 Inspect the condition and operational status of all cooling fans. With the power off, the
years fan axis should feel tight, and spinning the fan with a finger, the rotation should be
almost silent and not have abnormal rotation resistance. When in RUN mode, fan vi-
bration, excessive or strange noise is a sign of the bearings wearing, and the fan
should be replaced.

Grounding 1 year – The drive system requires a dedicated ground wire connecting the drive, the output
filter, and the motor to the building ground. Check that the ground connections are
tight and free of paint or oxidation. Daisy-chain connections are not allowed. Braided
straps are recommended if applicable.

PCB 1 year 10–12 Visually inspect the PCBs for signs of damage or degrading due to aging, corrosive en-
years vironments, dust, or environments with high temperatures. Only trained service per-
sonnel may perform the inspection and service action.

Power cables 1 year – Check for loose connections, aging, insulation condition, and proper torque to the
and wiring drive connections. Check for proper rating of fuses and continuity check. Observe if
there are any signs of operation in a demanding environment. For example, discolora-
tion of the fuse housing may be a sign of condensation or high temperatures.

Vibration 1 year – Check for abnormal vibration or noise coming from the drive to ensure that the envi-
ronment is stable for electronic components.

Insulator gas- 1 year 10–15 Inspect the insulators for signs of degradation due to high temperature and aging. Re-
kets years placement is based on findings or done at the same time as DC capacitor replacement.
Only trained service personnel may perform this action.

Spare Parts

Spare parts 1 year 2 years Stock spares in their original boxes in a dry and clean environment. Avoid hot storage
areas. Electrolytic capacitors require reforming as stated in the service schedule. The
reforming is performed by trained service personnel. See 10.2 Reforming the Capaci-
tors.

Exchange units 1 year 2 years Visually inspect for signs of damage, water, high humidity, corrosion, and dust within
and units stor- the visual field of view without disassembly. The exchange units with mounted elec-
ed for long pe- trolytic capacitors require reforming as stated in the service schedule. The reforming is
riods before performed by trained service personnel. See 10.2 Reforming the Capacitors.
commissioning

1
Defined as the time after the commissioning/start-up or the time from the previous inspection.
2
Defined as the time after the commissioning/start-up or the time from the previous service schedule actions.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 125

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Maintenance

10.2 Reforming the Capacitors

The electrolytic capacitors in the DC link rely on a chemical process to provide the insulator between the two metal plates. This
process can degrade over a period of years when the drive has been non-operational (stocked). The result is that the working volt-
age of the DC link gradually falls.
The correct course of action is to ensure that the insulation layer of the capacitor is ‘reformed’ by the application of a limited current
using a DC supply. Current limiting ensures that the heat generated within the capacitor is kept at a sufficiently low level to prevent
any damage.

D A N G E R
SHOCK HAZARD FROM CAPACITORS
The capacitors can be charged even when disconnected. Contact with this voltage can lead to death or serious injury.
- If the AC drive or spare capacitors are intended to be stocked, discharge the capacitors before storage. Use a measuring de-
vice to make sure that there is no voltage. If in doubt, contact your Danfoss Drives representative.

Case 1: AC drive which has been non-operational or stocked for over 2 years.
1. Connect the DC supply to L1 and L2 or the B+/B terminals (DC+ to B+, DC- to B-) of the DC link or directly to the capacitor
terminals. In the NX AC drives with no B+/B- terminals (FR8–FR9/FI8–FI9), connect the DC supply between 2 input phases
(L1 and L2).
2. Set the current limit maximum to 800 mA.
3. Slowly increase the DC voltage to the nominal DC voltage level of the AC drive (1.35 x Un AC).
4. Start to reform the capacitors.

The time of reforming depends on the time of storage. See Illustration 52.

9
A
e30bh487.10
8
7
6
5 C
4
3
2
1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
B
Illustration 52: Storage Time and Reforming Time

A Storage time (years) C Reforming time

B Reforming time (hours)

5. After the reforming operation is done, discharge the capacitors.

Case 2: Spare capacitor which has been stocked for over 2 years.
1. Connect the DC supply to DC+/DC- terminals.
2. Set the current limit maximum to 800 mA.
3. Slowly increase the DC voltage to the capacitor nominal voltage level. See information from component or service docu-
mentation.
4. Start to reform the capacitors.

The time of reforming depends on the time of storage. See Illustration 52.

126 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Maintenance

5. After the reforming operation is done, discharge the capacitors.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 127

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Fault Tracing

11 Fault Tracing
11.1 General Information on Fault Tracing
When the control diagnostics of the AC drive find an unusual condition in the operation of the drive, the drive shows this informa-
tion:
• This information shows on the display (see 8.5.1 Finding the Active Faults Menu):
- the location indication F1
- the fault code, see the Faults and Alarms section
For option board related fault codes, see the option board manual.
- a short description of the fault
- the fault type symbol, see Table 18
- the FAULT or ALARM symbol
• The red LED on the control panel starts to blink (only when a fault shows).
If many faults show at the same time, examine the list of active faults with the Browser buttons.
In the VACON® NX AC drives, there are 4 different types of faults.

Table 18: Fault Types

Fault type symbol Description

A (Alarm) The type A fault (Alarm) tells about unusual operation on the drive. It does not stop the drive. The 'A fault'
stays in the display for about 30 s.

F (Fault) The type 'F fault' stops the drive. To start the drive again, find a solution to the problem.

AR (Fault Autoreset) The type 'AR fault' stops the drive. The fault is reset automatically and the drive tries to start the motor
again. If it cannot the start the motor again, a fault trip (see FT, Fault Trip) shows.

FT (Fault Trip) If the drive cannot start the motor after an AR fault, an FT fault shows. The type 'FT fault' stops the AC
drive.

The fault stays active until it is reset, see 11.2 Resetting a Fault. The memory of active faults can keep the maximum of 10 faults in
the order in which they were shown.
Reset the fault with the [reset] button on the control panel, or through the control terminal, fieldbus, or the PC tool. The faults stay
in the Fault history.
Before asking help from the distributor or the factory because of unusual operation, prepare some data. Write down all the texts on
the display, the fault code, the source information, the Active Faults list, and the Fault History.

11.2 Resetting a Fault

The fault stays active until it is reset. Reset the fault using these instructions.

Procedure
1. Remove the external Start signal before resetting the fault to prevent that the drive starts again without a note.
2. There are 2 options to reset a fault:
- Push the [reset] button on the control panel for 2 s.
- Use a reset signal from the I/O terminal or fieldbus.

 The display goes back to the same state it was before the fault.

11.3 Creating Service Info File

Use these instructions to create a service info file in VACON® NCDrive PC tool to help to troubleshoot in a fault situation.

Make sure the VACON® NCDrive PC tool is installed on the computer. To install it, go to our website http://drives.danfoss.com/
downloads/portal/ .

128 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Fault Tracing

Procedure
1. Open the VACON® NCDrive.
2. Go to File and select Service Info....

 The service information file opens.

3. Save the service info file on the computer.

11.4 Error Message on Control Panel Display

The alphanumerical keypad memory has been upgraded from 32 kbit to 64 kbit in VACON® NX AC drives. This allows the applica-
tions with larger parameter sets to be copied to keypad memory. For more information on control panel display, see 3.8.3 Display
If an application with larger parameter sets is uploaded into 32 kbit control panel, it shows an error message "Failed". A new control
panel version with 64 kbit must be used to avoid the error message.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 129

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12 Specifications
12.1 Weights of the AC Drive
Enclosure size Weight, IP21/IP54 [kg] Weight, UL Type 1/Type 12 [lb.]

FR4 5.0 11.0

FR5 8.1 17.9

FR6 18.5 40.8

FR7 35.0 77.2

FR8 58.0 128

FR9 146 322

FR10 Standalone 340 750

FR11 Standalone(1) 470 1036

FR11 Standalone(1), 0460–0502, 690 V 400 882

1 Only available in IP21

12.2 Dimensions

12.2.1 List of Dimension Information

This topic gives a list of dimension information for different types of NXS/NXP AC Drives.
For Wall-mounted AC drives, see:
• 12.2.2.1 Dimensions for FR4–FR6
• 12.2.2.2 Dimensions for FR7
• 12.2.2.3 Dimensions for FR8
• 12.2.2.4 Dimensions for FR9
For Flange-mounted AC drives, see:
• 12.2.3.1 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR4–FR6
• 12.2.3.2 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR7–FR8
• 12.2.3.3 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR9
For Standalone AC drives, see:
• 12.2.4.1 Dimensions for FR10–FR11 Standalone

130 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.2.2 Wall-mounted

12.2.2.1 Dimensions for FR4–FR6

e30bf998.20
W2

D1
H1
H2

H3
W1 W1

Ø
IP21 IP54
Illustration 53: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR4–FR6

Table 19: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR4–FR6

Drive type W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 Ø

• 0003 2–0012 2 128 100 327 313 292 190 7

(5.04) (3.94) (12.87) (12.32) (11.5) (7.48) (0.27)
• 0003 5–0012 5

• 0017 2–0031 2 144 100 419 406 391 214 7

(5.67) (3.94) (16.5) (15.98) (15.39) (8.43) (0.27)
• 0016 5–0031 5

• 0048 2–0061 2 195 148 558 541 519 237 9

(7.68) (5.83) (21.97) (21.3) (20.43) (9.33) (0.35)
• 0038 5–0061 5
• 0004 6–0034 6

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 131

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

e30bh749.10
E3Ø

E1Ø

E4Ø

E2Ø

IP21 IP54
Illustration 54: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR4–FR6

Table 20: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes in mm (inch) for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR4–FR6

Drive type E1Ø, E1Ø, E2Ø, E2Ø, E3Ø, grom- E3Ø, gland E4Ø, grommet E4Ø, gland
grom- gland grom- gland met inside di- plate hole inside diame- plate hole
met plate met plate ameter(1) ter(1)
inside hole inside hole
diam- diam-
eter(1) eter(1)

• 0003 2– 13.5 20.3 13.5 20.3 • +QGLM: • +QGLM: • +QGLM: 16 • +QGLM:

0012 2 (0.53) (0.80) (0.53) (0.80) 13.5 (0.53) 20.3 (0.80) (0.63) 25.3 (3 x 1.0)
• 0003 5– • +QGLC: • +QGLC: 28 • +QGLC: 21 • +QGLC: 28
0012 5 21 (0.83) (1.1) (0.83) (1.1)

• 0017 2– 16 3x 16 3x 16 6 x 25.3 16 6 x 25.3

0025 2 (0.63) 25.3 (0.63) 25.3 (0.63) (6 x 1.0) (0.63) (6 x 1.0)
(3 x (3 x
• 0016 5–
1.0) 1.0)
0022 5

• 0031 2 21 33 16 25.3 21 25.3 16 33

(0.83) (1.30) (0.63) (1.0) (0.83) (1.0) (0.63) (1.30)
• 0031 5

• 0048 2– 21 3 x 33 21 3 x 33 16 • +QGLM: 3 x • +QGLM: 21 • +QGLM: 3 x

0061 2 (0.83) (3 x (0.83) (3 x (0.63) 25.3 (3 x 1.0) (0.83) 33 (3 x 1.30)
1.30) 1.30)
• 0038 5– • +QGLC: 3 x • +QGLC: 29 • +QGLC: 3 x
0061 5 28.3 (3 x (1.14) 37 (3 x 1.46)
1.11)
• 0004 6–
0034 6

1
Same as maximum cable thickness

132 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.2.2.2 Dimensions for FR7

e30bf999.20
H3

D1
H2

H1

W1 W1

W2 IP21 IP54

Illustration 55: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR7

Table 21: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR7

Drive type W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 Ø

• 0075 2–0114 2 237 190 630 614 591 257 9

(9.33) (7.48) (24.80) (24.17) (23.27) (10.12) (0.35)
• 0072 5–0105 5
• 0041 6–0052 6
e30bh750.10

E2Ø

E1Ø

E3Ø

IP21 IP54
Illustration 56: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR7

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 133

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Table 22: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes in mm (inch) for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR7

Drive type E1Ø, grommet E1Ø, gland E2Ø, grommet E2Ø, gland E3Ø, grommet E3Ø, gland
inside diame- plate hole inside diame- plate hole inside diame- plate hole
ter(1) ter(1) ter(1)

• 0075 2–0114 2 36 3 x 50.3 21 3 x 28.3 36 3 x 50.3

(1.42) (3 x 1.98) (0.83) (3 x 1.11) (1.42) (3 x 1.98)
• 0072 5–0105 5
• 0041 6–0052 6

1 Same as maximum cable thickness

12.2.2.3 Dimensions for FR8

e30bg001.20
W2

H1
H2

W1
D1

Illustration 57: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR8, IP21/IP54

134 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

e30bh835.10
H3

Illustration 58: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR8 with DC Connection Extension Box

Table 23: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR8

Drive type W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 Ø

• 0140 2–0205 2 291 255 758 732 1008 344 9

(11.47) (10.04) (29.88) (28.81) (39.69) (13.54) (0.35)
• 0140 5–0205 5
• 0062 6–0100 6
e30bh751.10

E2Ø

E3Ø
B- B+
R+ R-
E1Ø

Illustration 59: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR8

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 135

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Table 24: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes in mm (inch) for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR8

Drive type E1Ø, grommet inside diameter(1) E1Ø, gland E2Ø, grom- E2Ø, gland E3Ø, grom- E3Ø,
plate hole met inside plate hole met inside gland
diameter(1) diameter(1) plate
hole

2 x 59 – 6 x 28 60 75
• 0140 2–0205 2 • IP21: 2 x GD48, 48 (1.89)
(2 x 2.32) (6 x 1.10) (2.36) (2.95)
• 0140 5–0205 5 • IP54: 2 x MC07115, 56 (2.20)
• 0062 6–0100 6

1Same as maximum cable thickness. NOTE! Cable clamps have 40 mm internal diameter. The clamps are used for 360 degree grounding of the
shield. Exposing the cable shield decreases outer diameter of the cable so the recommended 3x185+95 mm2 MCCMK motor cables fit in the clamp.

12.2.2.4 Dimensions for FR9

e30bg002.20
D1 D2

H4 H3 W4
W3

W2

W1

H2 H5
H1
D3

Illustration 60: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9, IP21/IP54

H6
e30bh847.10
B-B+/R+R-
W5W5

Illustration 61: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9 with DC Extension Connection Box

136 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Table 25: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9, part 1

Drive type W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 D1 D2 D3

• 0261 2–0300 2 480 400 165 9 54 362 340 285

(18.9) (15.75) (15.74) (0.35) (2.13) (14.25) (13.39) (11.22)
• 0261 5–0300 5
• 0125 6–0208 6

Table 26: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9, part 2

Drive type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 Ø

• 0261 2–0300 2 1150 1120 721 205 16 1338 21

(45.28) (44.09) (28.39) (8.07) (0.63) (52.68) (0.83)
• 0261 5–0300 5
(1)
• 0125 6–0208 6

1 Brake resistor terminal box (H6) not included. For FR8 and FR9 when brake chopper or an additional DC connection is selected in type code, the

total height of the AC drive is increased by 203 mm (7.99 inch).

E3Ø e30bh752.10

B- B+
R+ R-

E2Ø

E1Ø

Illustration 62: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 137

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Table 27: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes in mm (inch) for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9

Drive type E1Ø, grommet inside diameter(1) E1Ø, gland E2Ø, grom- E2Ø, E2Ø, grom- E3Ø,
plate hole met inside gland met inside gland
diameter(1) plate hole diameter(1) plate hole

• 0261 2–0300 2 • IP21: 4 x GD48, 48 (1.89) 4 x 59 25 25 60 75

(4 x 2.32) (0.98) (0.98) (2.36) (2.95)
• 0261 5–0300 5 • IP54:
• 0125 6–0208 6 - 2 x GD48, 48 (1.89)
- 2 x MC07115 , 56 (2.20)

1 Same as maximum cable thickness. NOTE! Cable clamps have 40 mm internal diameter. The clamps are used for 360 degree grounding of the

shield. Exposing the cable shield decreases outer diameter of the cable so the recommended 3x185+95 mm2 MCCMK motor cables fit in the clamp.

12.2.3 Flange mounting

12.2.3.1 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR4–FR6

e30bg003.10
W2

H4

D1
H5
D2
H1
H2

H3
W1 W1

IP21 IP54
Illustration 63: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive with Flange, FR4–FR6

Table 28: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive with Flange, FR4–FR6

Drive type W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 D1 D2 Ø

0004 2–0012 2 128 113 337 325 327 30 22 190 77 7

0003 5–0012 5 (5.03) (4.45) (13.27) (12.8) (12.9) (1.18) (0.87) (7.48) (3.03) (0.27)

0017 2–0031 2 144 120 434 420 419 36 18 214 100 7

(5.67) (4.72) (17.09) (16.54) (16.5) (1.42) (0.71) (8.43) (3.94) (0.27)

138 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Drive type W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 D1 D2 Ø

0016 5–0031 5

0048 2–0061 2 195 170 560 549 558 30 20 237 106 6.5
0038 5–0061 5 (7.68) (6.69) (22.05) (21.61) (22) (1.18) (0.79) (9.33) (4.17) (0.26)
0004 6–0034 6

e30bg004.10
H2
Ø
W3

W2
W1
H1
H3 H4
Illustration 64: The Dimensions of the Opening and Drive Outline with Flange, FR4–FR6

Table 29: The Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the Opening and Drive Outline with Flange, FR4–FR6

Drive type W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 H4 Ø

0004 2–0012 2 123 113 – 315 325 – 5 6.5

0003 5–0012 5 (4.84) (4.45) (–) (12.40) (12.8) (–) (0.20) (0.26)

0017 2–0031 2 135 120 – 410 420 – 5 6.5

0016 5–0031 5 (5.31) (4.72) (–) (16.14) (16.54) (–) (0.20) (0.26)

0048 2–0061 2 185 170 157 539 549 7 5 6.5

0038 5–0061 5 (7.28) (6.69) (6.18) (21.22) (21.61) (0.27) (0.20) (0.26)
0004 6–0034 6

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 139

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.2.3.2 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR7–FR8

e30bg005.10
H7
W4
W2
Ø
H6

D1
H4

D2

H3
H2
H1

H4

W3 W3

W1 W1
H5

IP21 IP54
Illustration 65: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive with Flange, FR7–FR8

Table 30: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive with Flange, FR7–FR8, Part 1

Drive type W1 W2 W3 W4 D1 D2 Ø

0075 2–0114 2 237 175 270 253 257 109 6.5

0072 5–0105 5 (9.33) (6.89) (10.63) (9.96) (10.12) (4.29) (0.26)
0041 6–0052 6

0140 2–0205 2 289 – 355 330 344 110 9

0140 5–0205 5 (11.38) (–) (13.98) (12.99) (13.54) (4.33) (0.35)
0062 6–0100 6

Table 31: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive with Flange, FR7–FR8, Part 2

Drive type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7

0075 2–0114 2 652 632 630 188.5 188.5 23 20

0072 5–0105 5 (25.67) (24.88) (24.80) (7.42) (7.42) (0.91) (0.79)
0041 6–0052 6

0140 2–0205 2 832 – 759 258 265 43 57

0140 5–0205 5 (32.76) (–) (29.88) (10.16) (10.43) (1.69) (2.24)
0062 6–0100 6 (1)

1
The brake resistor terminal box (202.5 mm (7.97 in)) and conduit box (68 mm (2.68 in)) are not included.

140 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

e30bg006.10
H5 H2 H2 H3 H4

H1 H6
W1

W3
W2

Illustration 66: Dimensions of the Opening and Drive Outline with Flange, FR7

Table 32: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the Opening and Drive Outline with Flange, FR7

Drive type W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 Ø

0075 2–0114 2 233 175 253 619 188.5 188.5 34.5 32 7 7

0072 5–0105 5 (9.17) (6.89) (9.96) (24.4) (7.42) (7.42) (1.36) (1.26) (0.28) (0.28)
0041 6–0052 6

e30bg007.10
H2
H1
Ø
W1

W2

H3 H4 H4 H5

Illustration 67: Dimensions of the Opening and Drive Outline with Flange, FR8

Table 33: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the Opening and Drive Outline with Flange, FR8

Drive type W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 Ø

0140 2–0205 2 301 330 810 832 265 258 33 9

0140 5–0205 5 (11.85) (12.99) (31.89) (32.76) (10.43) (10.16) (1.30) (0.35)
0062 6–0100 6

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 141

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.2.3.3 Dimensions for Flange Mounting, FR9

e30bg008.10
Ø
D1

D2
D3
H4 H2 H4

H7
W5
W1

H5 H3 H3 H3 H5
W4

A B
W3

W2
W4

M5

H6 H1

Illustration 68: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9

A Top

B Opening

Table 34: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9, Part 1

Drive type W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 D1 D2 D3 Ø

0261 2–0300 2 530 510 485 200 5.5 362 340 109 21
0261 5–0300 5 (20.87) (20.08) (19.09) (7.87) (0.22) (14.25) (13.39) (4.29) (0.83)
0125 6–0208 6

Table 35: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR9, Part 2

Drive type H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7

0261 2–0300 2 1312 1150 420 100 35 9 2

0261 5–0300 5 (51.65) (45.28) (16.54) (3.94) (1.38) (0.35) (0.08)
0125 6–0208 6

142 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.2.4 Standalone

12.2.4.1 Dimensions for FR10–FR11 Standalone

e30bg009.10
W2 W3

D1
H1
H2

W1
H3
H4

Illustration 69: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR10 and FR11 Standalone

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 143

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

e30bh836.10
H5

Illustration 70: Dimensions of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR10 and FR11 Standalone with DC Connection Extension Box

Table 36: Dimensions in mm (in inch) of the VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR10 and FR11 Standalone

Drive type W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 D1

• 0385 5–0520 5 595 291 131 2018 1900 1435 512 2139 602
(23.43) (11.46) (5.16) (79.45) (74.8) (56.5) (20.16) (84.21) (23.70)
• 0261 6–0416 6

• 0590 5–0730 5 794 390 230 2018 1900 1435 512 2139 602
(31.26) (15.35) (9.06) (79.45) (74.80) (56.5) (20.16) (84.21) (23.70)
• 0460 6–0590 6

144 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

545 (21.5)

e30bh753.10
E1Ø E2Ø
77 (3.03)
225 (8.86)

E3Ø
285 (11.22)

67.5 115 (4.53)

(2.7)

Illustration 71: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR10 Standalone

Table 37: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes in mm (inch) for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR10 Standalone

Drive type E1Ø, grommet in- E1Ø, gland E2Ø, grommet in- E2Ø, gland E3Ø, mounting holes
side diameter(1) plate hole side diameter(1) plate hole for fixing to floor

• 0385 5–0520 5 4 x 21 4 x 28 4 x 48 4 x 60 9 x 11
(4 x 0.83) (4 x 1.10) (4 x 1.89) (4 x 2.36) (9 x 0.43)
• 0261 6–0416 6

1Same as maximum cable thickness. NOTE! Cable clamps have 40 mm internal diameter. The clamps are used for 360 degree grounding of the
shield. Exposing the cable shield decreases outer diameter of the cable so the recommended 3x185+95 mm2 MCCMK motor cables fit in the clamp.

742 (29.2)
e30bh754.10

E1Ø E2Ø
111.5 (4.39)
200 (7.87)

E3Ø
285 (11.22)

62.5 165 (6.50)

(2.46)

Illustration 72: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR11 Standalone

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 145

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Table 38: Dimensions of the Mounting Holes in mm (inch) for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drive, FR11 Standalone

Drive type E1Ø, grommet in- E1Ø, gland E2Ø, grommet in- E2Ø, gland E3Ø, mounting holes
side diameter(1) plate hole side diameter(1) plate hole for fixing to floor

• 0590 5–0730 5 4 x 21 4 x 28 8 x 48 8 x 60 9 x 11
(4 x 0.83) (4 x 1.10) (8 x 1.89) (8 x 2.36) (9 x 0.43)
• 0460 6–0590 6

1 Same as maximum cable thickness. NOTE! Cable clamps have 40 mm internal diameter. The clamps are used for 360 degree grounding of the

shield. Exposing the cable shield decreases outer diameter of the cable so the recommended 3x185+95 mm2 MCCMK motor cables fit in the clamp.

12.3 Cable and Fuse Sizes

12.3.1 List of Cable and Fuse Size Information

This topic lists the links to find the cable and fuse size tables for VACON™ NXS and NXP Air Cooled AC Drive.
Use external gG/gL or T/J fuses for overload and short-circuit protection.
• 12.3.2 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 208–240 V and 380–500 V, FR4 to FR9
• 12.3.4 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V, FR6 to FR9
• 12.3.6 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 380–500 V, FR10 to FR11 Standalone
• 12.3.8 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V, FR10 to FR11
For AC Drives in North America, see:
• 12.3.3 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 208–240 V and 380–500 V, FR4 to FR9, North America
• 12.3.5 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), FR6 to FR9, North America
• 12.3.7 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 380–500 V, FR10 to FR11, North America
• 12.3.9 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), FR10 to FR11, North America

12.3.2 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 208–240 V and 380–500 V, FR4 to FR9
Table 39: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP

Enclosure Drive type IL [A] Fuse Mains, motor and Mains terminal [mm2] Grounding terminal
size (gG/gL) [A] brake resistor cable [mm2]
Cu(1) [mm2]

FR4 0003 2–0008 2 3–8 10 3*1.5+1.5 1–4 1–4

0003 5–0009 5 3–9

0011 2–0012 2 11–12 16 3*2.5+2.5 1–4 1–4

0012 5 12

FR5 0017 2 17 20 3*4+4 1–10 1–10

0016 5 16

0025 2 25 25 3*6+6 1–10 1–10

0022 5 22

0031 2 31 35 3*10+10 1–10 1–10

0031 5 31

FR6 0048 2 48 50 3*10+10 2.5–50 Cu 2.5–35

0038 5–0045 5 38–45 6–50 Al

0061 2 61 63 3*16+16 2.5–50 Cu 2.5–35

146 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive type IL [A] Fuse Mains, motor and Mains terminal [mm2] Grounding terminal
size (gG/gL) [A] brake resistor cable [mm2]
Cu(1) [mm2]
0061 5 6–50 Al

FR7 0075 2 75 80 3*25+16 2.5–50 Cu 6–70

0072 5 72 6–50 Al

0088 2 88 100 3*35+16 2.5–50 Cu 6–70

0087 5 87 6–50 Al

0114 2 114 125 3*50+25 2.5–50 Cu 6–70

0105 5 105 6–50 Al

FR8 0140 2 140 160 3*70+35 25–95 Cu/Al 6–95

0140 5

0170 2 168 200 3*95+50 95–185 Cu/Al 6–95

0168 5

0205 2 205 250 3*150+70 95–185 Cu/Al 6–95

0205 5

FR9 0261 2 261 315 3*185+95 or 95–185 Cu/Al 6–95

0261 5 2*(3*120+70)

0300 2 300 315 2*(3*120+70) 95–185 Cu/Al 6–95

0300 5

1 Uses a correction factor 0.7

12.3.3 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 208–240 V and 380–500 V, FR4 to FR9, North America
Table 40: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP, North America

Enclosure Drive type Fuse Class Mains, Motor, and brake re- Mains terminal [AWG] Grounding terminal
size Fast Acting sistor cable Cu [AWG](1)(2) [AWG]
(T/J) [A]

FR4 0003 2–0008 2 10 3*16 AWG + 16 AWG 18 AWG - 4 AWG 18 AWG - 4 AWG
0003 5–0007 5

0009 5 15 3*16 AWG + 16 AWG 18 AWG - 4 AWG 18 AWG - 4 AWG

0011 2–0012 2 15 3*14 AWG + 14 AWG 18 AWG - 4 AWG 18 AWG - 4 AWG

0012 5

FR5 0017 2 20 3*12 AWG + 12 AWG 18 AWG - 8 AWG 18 AWG - 8 AWG

0016 5

0025 2 30 3*10 AWG + 10 AWG 18 AWG - 8 AWG 18 AWG - 8 AWG

0022 5

0031 2 40 3*8 AWG + 8 AWG 18 AWG - 8 AWG 18 AWG - 8 AWG

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 147

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive type Fuse Class Mains, Motor, and brake re- Mains terminal [AWG] Grounding terminal
size Fast Acting sistor cable Cu [AWG](1)(2) [AWG]
(T/J) [A]

0031 5

FR6 0038 5 50 3*8 AWG + 8 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0048 2 60 3*8 AWG + 8 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

0045 5 10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0061 2 90 3*6 AWG + 6 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

0061 5 10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

FR7 0075 2 90 3*4 AWG + 6 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 10 AWG - 2/0 AWG
0072 5 10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0088 2 110 3*2 AWG + 6 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 10 AWG - 2/0 AWG
0087 5 10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0114 2 150 3*2 AWG + 4 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 10 AWG - 2/0 AWG
0105 5 10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

FR8 0140 2 175 3*2/0 AWG + 2 AWG 4 AWG - 3/0 AWG Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG
0140 5

0170 2 250 3*3/0 AWG + 1/0 AWG 3/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG
0168 5

0205 2 250 3*300 kcmil + 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG
0205 5

FR9 0261 2 350 3*350 kcmil + 3/0 AWG 3/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG
0261 5 2*(3*250 kcmil + 2/0 AWG)

0300 2 400 2*(3*250 kcmil + 2/0 AWG) 3/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG
0300 5

1 Uses a correction factor 0.7

2
Use cables with a +90 °C (194 °F) heat resistance to comply with the UL standards.

12.3.4 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V, FR6 to FR9

Table 41: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP

Enclosure Drive type IL [A] Fuse Mains, motor, and Mains terminal [mm2] Grounding terminal
size (gG/gL) [A] brake resistor cable [mm2]
Cu (1)[mm2]

FR6 0004 6–0007 6 3–7 10 3*2.5+2.5 2.5–50 Cu 2.5–35

6–50 Al

0010 6–0013 6 10–13 16 3*2.5+2.5 2.5–50 Cu 2.5–35

6–50 Al

148 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive type IL [A] Fuse Mains, motor, and Mains terminal [mm2] Grounding terminal
size (gG/gL) [A] brake resistor cable [mm2]
Cu (1)[mm2]

0018 6 18 20 3*4+4 2.5–50 Cu 2.5–35

6–50 Al

0022 6 22 25 3*6+6 2.5–50 Cu 2.5–35

6–50 Al

0027 6–0034 6 27–34 35 3*10+10 2.5–50 Cu 2.5–35

6–50 Al

FR7 0041 6 41 50 3*10+10 2.5–50 Cu 6–50

6–50 Al

0052 6 52 63 3*16+16 2.5–50 Cu 6–50

6–50 Al

FR8 0062 6–0080 6 62–80 80 3*25+16 25–95 Cu/Al 6–95

0100 6 100 100 3*35+16

FR9 0125 6–0144 6 125–144 160 3*95+50 95–185 Cu/Al 6–95

0170 6 170 200

0208 6 208 250 3*150+70

1 Uses a correction factor 0.7

12.3.5 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), FR6 to FR9, North America
Table 42: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP, North America, UL Rating 525–600 V

Enclosure Drive type Fuse Class Mains, Motor, and brake Mains terminal [AWG] Grounding terminal
size Fast Acting resistor cable Cu [AWG](1)(2) [AWG]
(T/J) [A]

FR6 0004 6–0007 6 10 3*14 AWG + 14 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG
10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0010 6 15 3*14 AWG + 14 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0013 6 20 3*14 AWG + 14 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0018 6 25 3*12 AWG + 12 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0022 6 30 3*10 AWG + 10 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0027 6 40 3*8 AWG + 8 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 149

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive type Fuse Class Mains, Motor, and brake Mains terminal [AWG] Grounding terminal
size Fast Acting resistor cable Cu [AWG](1)(2) [AWG]
(T/J) [A]

0034 6 50 3*8 AWG + 8 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 14 AWG - 2 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

FR7 0041 6 50 3*8 AWG + 8 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 10 AWG - 1 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

0052 6 70 3*6 AWG + 6 AWG 14 AWG - 1 AWG Cu 10 AWG - 1 AWG

10 AWG - 1 AWG Al

FR8 0062 6 80 3*4 AWG + 6 AWG 4 AWG - 3/0 AWG Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG

0080 6 100 3*4 AWG + 6 AWG 4 AWG - 3/0 AWG Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG

0100 6 125 3*2 AWG + 6 AWG 4 AWG - 3/0 AWG Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG

FR9 0125 6–0144 6 200 3*3/0 AWG + 1/0 AWG 3/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG

0170 6 250 3*3/0 AWG + 1/0 AWG 3/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG

0208 6 300 3*300 kcmil + 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG - 350 kcmil Cu/Al 10 AWG - 3/0 AWG

1 Uses a correction factor 0.7.

2 Use cables with a +90 °C (194 °F) heat resistance to comply with the UL standards.

12.3.6 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 380–500 V, FR10 to FR11 Standalone
NOTE! In FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives, the drive cabinet includes ultra-fast aR fuses for short-circuit protection. Use external gG
or T/J fuses for overload protection in the FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives.

Table 43: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP

Enclosure size Drive type IL [A] Fuse (gG/gL) [A] Mains, motor, and brake resis- Number of Number of mo-
tor cable (1) [mm2] supply cables tor cables

FR10 Standalone 0385 5 385 400 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*120+70) Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 2*(3*185Al+57Cu)

0460 5 460 500 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*150+70) Even/Odd Even/Odd

0520 5 520 630 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*185+95) Even/Odd Even/Odd

FR11 Standalone 0590 5 590 315 (6 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*95+50) Even Even/Odd
Al: 4*(3*120Al+41Cu)

0650 5 650 400 (6 pcs) Cu: 4*(3*95+50) Even Even/Odd

Al: 4*(3*150Al+41Cu)

0730 5 730 400 (6 pcs) Cu: 4*(3*120+70) Even Even/Odd

Al: 4*(3*185Al+57Cu)

1
Uses a correction factor 0.7

150 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.3.7 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 380–500 V, FR10 to FR11, North America
NOTE! In FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives, the drive cabinet includes ultra-fast aR fuses for short-circuit protection. Use external gG
or T/J fuses for overload protection in the FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives.

Table 44: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP, North America

Enclosure Drive type Fuse Class Fast Mains, Motor, and brake resistor cable Cu Number of Number of
size Acting (T/J) [A] [AWG](1)(2) supply cables motor cables

FR10 0385 5 500 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*250 kcmil + 2/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 2*(3*350 kcmil Al + 1/0 AWG Cu)

0460 5 600 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*300 kcmil + 2/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd

0520 5 700 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*350 kcmil + 3/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd

FR11 0590 5 400 (6 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*500 kcmil + 250 kcmil) Even Even/Odd
Al: 4*(3*250 kcmil Al + 1 AWG Cu)

0650 5 400 (6 pcs) Cu: 4*(3*3/0 AWG + 1/0 AWG) Even Even/Odd
Al: 4*(3*300 kcmil Al + 1 AWG Cu)

0730 5 500 (6 pcs) Cu: 4*(3*300 kcmil + 2/0 AWG) Even Even/Odd
Al: 4*(3*350 kcmil Al + 1/0 AWG Cu)

1 Uses a correction factor 0.7.

2 Use cables with a +90 °C (194 °F) heat resistance to comply with the UL standards.

12.3.8 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V, FR10 to FR11

NOTE! In FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives, the drive cabinet includes ultra-fast aR fuses for short-circuit protection. Use external gG
or T/J fuses for overload protection in the FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives.

Table 45: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP

Enclosure Drive type IL [A] Fuse (gG/gL) [A] Mains, motor, and brake resistor ca- Number of Number of mo-
size ble (1) [mm2] supply cables tor cables

FR10 0261 6 261 315 (3 pcs) Cu: 3*185+95 Even/Odd Even/Odd

Al: 2*(3*95Al+29Cu)

0325 6 325 400 (3 pcs) Cu: 2x(3*95 + 50) Even/Odd Even/Odd

Al: 2*(3*150Al+41Cu)

0385 6 385 400 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*120+70) Even/Odd Even/Odd

Al: 2*(3*185Al+57Cu)

0416 6 416 500 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*150+70) Even/Odd Even/Odd

Al: 2*(3*185Al+57Cu)

FR11 0460 6 460 500 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*150+70) Even/Odd Even/Odd

Al: 2*(3*240Al+72Cu)

0502 6 502 630 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*185+95) Even/Odd Even/Odd

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 151

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive type IL [A] Fuse (gG/gL) [A] Mains, motor, and brake resistor ca- Number of Number of mo-
size ble (1) [mm2] supply cables tor cables

Al: 4x(3x95+29)

0590 6 590 315 (6 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*240+120) Even Even/Odd

Al: 4*(3*120Al+41Cu)

1
Uses a correction factor 0.7

12.3.9 Cable and Fuse Sizes for 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), FR10 to FR11, North America
NOTE! In FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives, the drive cabinet includes ultra-fast aR fuses for short-circuit protection. Use external gG
or T/J fuses for overload protection in the FR10 and FR11 Standalone drives.

Table 46: Cable and Fuse Sizes for VACON® NXS/NXP, North America, UL Rating 525–600 V

Enclo- Drive type Fuse Class Fast Mains, Motor, and brake resistor cable Cu(1) Number of Number of
sure size Acting (T/J) [A] [AWG](2) supply ca- motor cables
bles

FR10 0261 6 350 (3 pcs) Cu: 3*350 kcmil + 3/0 AWG Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 2*(3*3/0 AWG Al + 2 AWG Cu)

0325 6 400 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*3/0 AWG + 1/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 2*(3*300 kcmil Al + 1 AWG Cu)

0385 6 500 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*250 kcmil + 2/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 2*(3*350 kcmil Al + 1/0 AWG Cu)

0416 6 500 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*300 kcmil + 2/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 2*(3*350 kcmil Al + 1/0 AWG Cu)

FR11 0460 6 600 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*300 kcmil + 2/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 2*(3*500 kcmil Al + 2/0 AWG Cu)

0502 6 700 (3 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*350 kcmil + 3/0 AWG) Even/Odd Even/Odd
Al: 4x(3x3/0AWG)

0590 6 400 (6 pcs) Cu: 2*(3*500 kcmil + kcmil250) Even Even/Odd

Al: 4*(3*250 kcmil Al + 1 AWG Cu)

1
Use cables with a +90 °C (194 °F) heat resistance to comply with the UL standards.
2
Uses a correction factor 0.7

12.4 Cable Stripping Lengths

See Illustration 73 for parts of cables to be stripped and check the corresponding stripping length in the table.

152 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

e30bg081.10
Grounding conductor

C1

C2
A1

A2
D1

D2
B1

B2

MAINS MOTOR
Illustration 73: Cable Stripping

Table 47: Cable Stripping Lengths [mm]

Enclosure size A1 B1 C1 D1 A2 B2 C2 D2

FR4 15 35 10 20 7 50 7 35

FR5 20 40 10 30 20 60 10 40

FR6 20 90 15 60 20 90 15 60

FR7 25 120 25 120 25 120 25 120

FR8, 0140 23 240 23 240 23 240 23 240

FR8, 0168–0205 28 240 28 240 28 240 28 240

FR9 28 295 28 295 28 295 28 295

Table 48: Cable Stripping Lengths [in]

Enclosure size A1 B1 C1 D1 A2 B2 C2 D2

FR4 0.59 1.38 0.39 0.79 0.28 1.97 0.28 1.38

FR5 0.79 1.57 0.39 1.18 0.79 2.36 0.79 1.57

FR6 0.79 3.54 0.59 2.36 0.79 3.54 0.59 2.36

FR7 0.98 4.72 0.98 4.72 0.98 4.72 0.98 4.72

FR8, 0140 0.91 9.45 0.91 9.45 0.91 9.45 0.91 9.45
FR8, 0168–0205 1.10 9.45 1.10 9.45 1.10 9.45 1.10 9.45

FR9 1.10 11.61 1.10 11.61 1.10 11.61 1.10 11.61

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 153

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.5 Tightening Torques for Cover Screws

Enclosure size and class Cable cover screws (Nm) Screws on the cover of the AC drive (Nm)

FR4/FI4 IP54 2.2 0.7

FR5 IP21/ IP54 2.2 0.7

FR6/FI6 IP21/ IP54 2.2 0.7

FR7/FI7 IP21/ IP54 2.4 0.8

FR8/FI8 IP54 0.8 Nm(1) 0.8

FR9 0.8 0.8

1 The cover of the power unit.

Enclosure size and class Safety cover screws (Nm)

FR10 Standalone 4.2

FR11 Standalone 4.2

12.6 Tightening Torques of the Terminals

Table 49: Tightening Torques of the Mains and Motor Terminals

Enclosure size Drive type Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (in-lb)

FR4 0004 2–0012 2 0.5–0.6 4.5–5.3

0003 5–0012 5

FR5 0017 2–0031 2 1.2–1.5 10.6–13.3

0016 5–0031 5

FR6 0048 2–0061 2 10 88.5

0038 5–0061 5
0004 6–0034 6

FR7 0075 2–0114 2 10 88.5

0072 5–0105 5
0041 6–0052 6

FR8 0140 2 20 177

0140 5
0062 6–0100 6

FR8 0168 2–0205 2 40 354

0168 5–0205 5

FR9 0261 2–0300 2 40 354

0261 5–0300 5

154 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure size Drive type Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (in-lb)

0125 6–0208 6

FR10 Standalone 0385 5–0520 5 40 354

0261 6–0416 6

FR11 Standalone 0590 5–0730 5 40 354

0460 6–0590 6

12.7 Power ratings

12.7.1 Overload Capability

The low overload means that if 110% of the continuous current (IL) is required for 1 minute every 10 minutes, the remaining 9
minutes must be approximately 98% of IL or less. This is to make sure that the output current is not more than IL during the duty
cycle.

e30bg038.10
I

IL*110% IL*110%

IL

1 min 9 min

t
Illustration 74: Low Overload

The high overload means that if 150% of the continuous current (IH) is required for 1 minute every 10 minutes, the remaining 9
minutes must be approximately 92% of IH or less. This is to make sure that the output current is not more than IH during the duty
cycle.
e30bg039.10

I I
H*150% H*150%

I
H

1 min 9 min

t
Illustration 75: High Overload

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 155

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

For more information, refer to the standard IEC61800-2.

12.7.2 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 208–240 V

Table 50: Power Ratings in Mains 208–240 V, 50 Hz, 3~

Enclo- Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High load- Loadabili- Motor Motor
sure size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- ability: ty: Max IS shaft pow- shaft pow-
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) 50% over- 2s er(3): 10% er(3): 50%
load I [A] load I [A] overload overload
40°C [kW] 50°C [kW]

FR4 0003 3.7 3.7 4.1 2.4 3.6 4.8 0.55 0.37

0004 4.8 4.8 5.3 3.7 5.6 7.4 0.75 0.55

0007 6.6 6.6 7.3 4.8 7.2 9.6 1.1 0.75

0008 7.8 7.8 8.6 6.6 9.9 13.2 1.5 1.1

0011 11 11.0 12.1 7.8 11.7 15.6 2.2 1.5

0012 12.5 12.5 13.8 11.0 16.5 22.0 3.0 2.2

FR5 0017 17.5 17.5 19.3 12.5 18.8 25.0 4.0 3.0

0025 25 25 27.5 17.5 26.3 35.0 5.5 4.0

0031 31 31 34.1 25.0 37.5 50.0 7.5 5.5

FR6 0048 48 48 52.8 31.0 46.5 62.0 11.0 7.5

0061 61 61.0 67.1 48.0 72.0 96.0 15.0 11.0

FR7 0075 75 75.0 83.0 61.0 92.0 122.0 22.0 15.0

0088 88 88.0 97.0 75.0 113.0 150.0 22.0 22.0

0114 114 114.0 125.0 88.0 132.0 176.0 30.0 22.0

FR8 0140 140 140.0 154.0 105.0 158.0 210.0 37.0 30.0

0170 170 170.0 187.0 140.0 210.0 280.0 45.0 37.0

0205 205 205.0 226.0 170.0 255.0 340.0 55.0 45.0

FR9 0261 261 261.0 287.0 205.0 308.0 410.0 75.0 55.0

0300 300 300.0 330.0 245.0 368.0 490.0 90.0 75.0

1
The currents in given ambient temperatures are achieved only when the switching frequency is the same or smaller than the factory default.
2
See 12.7.1 Overload Capability
3
230 V

156 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.7.3 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 208–240 V, North America

Table 51: Power Ratings in Mains 208–240 V, 60 Hz, 3~, North America

Enclo- Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High load- Loadabili- Motor Motor
sure size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- ability: ty: Max IS shaft pow- shaft pow-
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) 50% over- 2s er(3): 10% er(3): 50%
load I [A] load I [A] overload overload
104°F [hp] 122°F [hp]

FR4 0003 3.7 3.7 4.1 2.4 3.6 4.8 0.75 0.5

0004 4.8 4.8 5.3 3.7 5.6 7.4 1 0.75

0007 6.6 6.6 7.3 4.8 7.2 9.6 1.5 1

0008 7.8 7.8 8.6 6.6 9.9 13.2 2 1.5

0011 11 11.0 12.1 7.8 11.7 15.6 3 2

0012 12.5 12.5 13.8 11.0 16.5 22.0 4 3

FR5 0017 17.5 17.5 19.3 12.5 18.8 25.0 5 4

0025 25 25 27.5 17.5 26.3 35.0 7.5 5

0031 31 31 34.1 25.0 37.5 50.0 10 7.5

FR6 0048 48 48 52.8 31.0 46.5 62.0 15 10

0061 61 61.0 67.1 48.0 72.0 96.0 20 15

FR7 0075 75 75.0 83.0 61.0 92.0 122.0 25 20

0088 88 88.0 97.0 75.0 113.0 150.0 30 25

0114 114 114.0 125.0 88.0 132.0 176.0 40 30

FR8 0140 140 140.0 154.0 105.0 158.0 210.0 50 40

0170 170 170.0 187.0 140.0 210.0 280.0 60 50

0205 205 205.0 226.0 170.0 255.0 340.0 75 60

FR9 0261 261 261.0 287.0 205.0 308.0 410.0 100 75

0300 300 300.0 330.0 245.0 368.0 490.0 125 100

1
The currents in given ambient temperatures are achieved only when the switching frequency is the same or smaller than the factory default.
2
See 12.7.1 Overload Capability
3
240 V

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 157

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.7.4 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 380–500 V

Table 52: Power Ratings in Mains 380–500 V, 50 Hz, 3~

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS shaft shaft
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% 2s power(3): power(3):
load I [A] overload I 10% over- 50% over-
[A] load 40°C load 50°C
[kW] [kW]

FR4 0003 3.3 3.3 3.6 2.2 3.3 4.4 1.1 0.75

0004 4.3 4.3 4.7 3.3 5 6.6 1.5 1.1

0005 5.6 5.6 6.2 4.3 6.5 8.6 2.2 1.5

0007 7.6 7.6 8.4 5.6 8.4 11.2 3 2.2

0009 9 9 9.9 7.6 11.4 15.2 4 3

0012 12 12 13.2 9 13.5 18 5.5 4

FR5 0016 16 16 17.6 12 18 24 7.5 5.5

0022 23 23 25.3 16 24 32 11 7.5

0031 31 31 34 23 35 44 15 11

FR6 0038 38 38 42 31 47 62 18.5 15

0045 46 46 49.5 38 57 76 22 18.5

0061 61 61 67 46 69 92 30 22

FR7 0072 72 72 79 61 92 122 37 30

0087 87 87 96 72 108 144 45 37

0105 105 105 116 87 131 174 55 45

FR8 0140 140 140 154 105 158 210 75 55

0168 170 170 187 140 210 280 90 75

0205 205 205 226 170 255 340 110 90

FR9 0261 261 261 287.1 205 308 410 132 110

0300 300 300 330 245 368 490 160 132

FR10(3) 0385 385 385 424 300 450 600 200 160

0460 460 460 506 385 578 770 250 200

0520 520 520 576 460 690 920 250 250

158 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS shaft shaft
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% 2s power(3): power(3):
load I [A] overload I 10% over- 50% over-
[A] load 40°C load 50°C
[kW] [kW]

FR11(3) 0590 590 590 649 520 780 1040 315 250

0650 650 650 715 590 885 1180 355 315

0730 730 730 803 650 975 1300 400 355

1 The currents in given ambient temperatures are achieved only when the switching frequency is the same or smaller than the factory default.
2 See 12.7.1 Overload Capability
3 400 V

12.7.5 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 380–500 V, North America

Table 53: Power Ratings in Mains 380–500 V, 60 Hz, 3~

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS shaft pow- shaft pow-
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% 2s er(3): 10% er(3): 50%
load I [A] overload I overload overload
[A] 104°F [hp] 122°F [hp]

FR4 0003 3.3 3.3 3.6 2.2 3.3 4.4 2 1.5

0004 4.3 4.3 4.7 3.3 5 6.6 3 2

0005 5.6 5.6 6.2 4.3 6.5 8.6 4 3

0007 7.6 7.6 8.4 5.6 8.4 11.2 5 4

0009 9 9 9.9 7.6 11.4 15.2 7.5 5

0012 12 12 13.2 9 13.5 18 10 7.5

FR5 0016 16 16 17.6 12 18 24 13 10

0022 23 23 25.3 16 24 32 20 13

0031 31 31 34 23 35 44 25 20

FR6 0038 38 38 42 31 47 62 30 25

0045 46 46 49.5 38 57 76 40 30

0061 61 61 67 46 69 92 50 40

FR7 0072 72 72 79 61 92 122 60 50

0087 87 87 96 72 108 144 75 60

0105 105 105 116 87 131 174 90 75

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 159

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS shaft pow- shaft pow-
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% 2s er(3): 10% er(3): 50%
load I [A] overload I overload overload
[A] 104°F [hp] 122°F [hp]

FR8 0140 140 140 154 105 158 210 125 90

0168 170 170 187 140 210 280 150 125

0205 205 205 226 170 255 340 175 150

FR9 0261 261 261 287.1 205 308 410 200 175

0300 300 300 330 245 368 490 250 200

FR10(3) 0385 385 385 424 300 450 600 350 250

0460 460 460 506 385 578 770 400 350

0520 520 520 576 460 690 920 450 400

FR11(3) 0590 590 590 649 520 780 1040 500 450

0650 650 650 715 590 885 1180 600 500

0730 730 730 803 650 975 1300 650 600

1 The currents in given ambient temperatures are achieved only when the switching frequency is the same or smaller than the factory default.
2 See 12.7.1 Overload Capability
3 480 V

12.7.6 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V)
Table 54: Power Ratings in Mains 525–600 V, 50 Hz, 3~

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS 2 shaft shaft
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% s power(3): power(3):
load I [A] overload I 10% over- 50% over-
[A] load 40°C load 50°C
[kW] [kW]

FR6 0004 4.5 4.5 5.0 3.2 4.8 6.4 3.0 2.2

0005 5.5 5.5 6.1 4.5 6.8 9.0 4.0 3.0

0007 7.5 7.5 8.3 5.5 8.3 11.0 5.5 4.0

0010 10.0 10.0 11.0 7.5 11.3 15.0 7.5 5.5

0013 13.5 13.5 14.9 10.0 15.0 20.0 11.0 7.5

0018 18.0 18 19.8 13.5 20.3 27.0 15.0 11.0

0022 22.0 22.0 24.2 18.0 27.0 36.0 18.5 15.0

160 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS 2 shaft shaft
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% over- ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% s power(3): power(3):
load I [A] overload I 10% over- 50% over-
[A] load 40°C load 50°C
[kW] [kW]

0027 27.0 27.0 29.7 22.0 33.0 44.0 22.0 18.5

0034 34.0 34.0 37.0 27.0 41.0 54.0 30.0 22.0

FR7 0041 41.0 41.0 45.0 34.0 51.0 68.0 37.5 30.0

0052 52.0 52.0 57.0 41.0 62.0 82.0 45.0 37.5

FR8 0062 62.0 62.0 68.0 52.0 78.0 104.0 55.0 45.0

0080 80.0 80.0 88.0 62.0 93.0 124.0 75.0 55.0

0100 100.0 100.0 110.0 80.0 120.0 160.0 90.0 75.0

FR9 0125 125.0 125.0 138.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 110.0 90.0

0144 144.0 144.0 158.0 125.0 188.0 250.0 132.0 110.0

0170 170.0 170.0 187.0 144.0 216.0 288.0 160.0 132.0

0208 208.0 208.0 229.0 170.0 255.0 340.0 200.0 160.0

FR10(3) 0261 261.0 261.0 287.0 208.0 312.0 416.0 250.0 200.0

0325 325.0 325.0 358.0 261.0 392.0 522.0 315.0 250.0

0385 385.0 385.0 424.0 325.0 488.0 650.0 355.0 315.0

0416 416.0 416.0 358.0 325.0 488.0 650.0 400.0 315.0

FR11(3) 0460 460.0 460.0 506.0 385.0 578.0 770.0 450.0 355.0

0502 502.0 502.0 552.0 460.0 690.0 920.0 500.0 450.0

0590 590.0 590.0 649.0 502.0 753.0 1004.0 560.0 500.0

1
The currents in given ambient temperatures are achieved only when the switching frequency is the same or smaller than the factory default.
2
See 12.7.1 Overload Capability
3
690 V

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 161

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.7.7 Power Ratings for Mains Voltage 525–690 V (UL Rating 600 V), North America
Table 55: Power Ratings in Mains 525–600 V, 60 Hz, 3~

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS 2 shaft shaft
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% s power(3): power(3):
overload I overload I 10% over- 50% over-
[A] [A] load load
104°F [hp] 122°F [hp]

FR6 0004 4.5 4.5 5.0 3.2 4.8 6.4 3 2

0005 5.5 5.5 6.1 4.5 6.8 9.0 4 3

0007 7.5 7.5 8.3 5.5 8.3 11.0 5 4

0010 10.0 10.0 11.0 7.5 11.3 15.0 7.5 5

0013 13.5 13.5 14.9 10.0 15.0 20.0 10 7.5

0018 18.0 18 19.8 13.5 20.3 27.0 15 10

0022 22.0 22.0 24.2 18.0 27.0 36.0 20 15

0027 27.0 27.0 29.7 22.0 33.0 44.0 25 20

0034 34.0 34.0 37.0 27.0 41.0 54.0 30 25

FR7 0041 41.0 41.0 45.0 34.0 51.0 68.0 40 30

0052 52.0 52.0 57.0 41.0 62.0 82.0 50 40

FR8 0062 62.0 62.0 68.0 52.0 78.0 104.0 60 50

0080 80.0 80.0 88.0 62.0 93.0 124.0 75 60

0100 100.0 100.0 110.0 80.0 120.0 160.0 100 75

FR9 0125 125.0 125.0 138.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 125 100

0144 144.0 144.0 158.0 125.0 188.0 250.0 150 125

0170 170.0 170.0 187.0 144.0 216.0 288.0 150 150

0208 208.0 208.0 229.0 170.0 255.0 340.0 200 150

FR10(3) 0261 261.0 261.0 287.0 208.0 312.0 416.0 250 200

0325 325.0 325.0 358.0 261.0 392.0 522.0 350 250

0385 385.0 385.0 424.0 325.0 488.0 650.0 400 350

0416 416.0 416.0 358.0 325.0 488.0 650.0 450 350

162 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure Drive Input Low load- Low load- High High Loadabili- Motor Motor
size type current ability: IL ability: loadabili- loadabili- ty: Max IS 2 shaft shaft
Iin(1) [A](2) 10% ty: IH [A](2) ty: 50% s power(3): power(3):
overload I overload I 10% over- 50% over-
[A] [A] load load
104°F [hp] 122°F [hp]

FR11(3) 0460 460.0 460.0 506.0 385.0 578.0 770.0 500 450

0502 502.0 502.0 552.0 460.0 690.0 920.0 550 500

0590 590.0 590.0 649.0 502.0 753.0 1004.0 600 550

1 The currents in given ambient temperatures are achieved only when the switching frequency is the same or smaller than the factory default.
2 See 12.7.1 Overload Capability
3 575 V

12.8 VACON® NXP Technical Data

Table 56: Technical Data

Technical item or function Technical data

Connection of Input voltage Uin 208–240 V, 380–500 V, 525–690 V, UL rating up to 600 V, -10%…+10%
mains
Input frequency 45–66 Hz

Connection to mains Once per minute or less

Starting delay 2 s (FR4 to FR8), 5 s (FR9)

Network imbalance Maximum ±3% of the nominal voltage

Mains Mains types: TN, TT, and IT short-circuit current: the maximum short-
circuit current must be < 100 kA.

Motor connection Output voltage 0-Uin

Constant output current IL: Ambient temperature maximum +40 °C (104 °F) overload 1.1 x IL
(1 min/10 min)
IH: Ambient temperature maximum +50 °C (122 °F) overload 1.5 x IH
(1 min/10 min)
For 50–55 °C (122–131 °F) ambient temperatures use derating factor
2.5% / 1 °C (°F).

Starting current IS for 2 s each 20 s. After 2 s the current controller reduces the current
to 150% IH.

Output frequency 0–320 Hz (standard VACON® NXP and NXS); 7200 Hz (special NXP with
special software)

Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz (VACON® NXS); Application-dependent (VACON® NXP)

Control qualities Control method Frequency control U/f, Open Loop Sensorless Vector Control, Closed
Loop Vector Control (VACON® NXP only)

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 163

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Technical item or function Technical data

Switching frequency (see param- 208–240 V and 380–500 V, up to 0061: 1–16 kHz
eter P2.6.9) Default: 6 kHz
208–240 V, 0075 and larger: 1–10 kHz
Default: 3.6 kHz
380–500 V, 0072 and larger: 1–6 kHz
Default: 3.6 kHz
525–690 V: 1–6 kHz
Default: 1.5 kHz

Frequency reference Resolution 0.1% (VACON® NXP: 12-bit), accuracy ±1%

Analog input Resolution 0.01 Hz
Panel reference

Field weakening point 8–320 Hz

Acceleration time 0.1–3000 s

Deceleration time 0.1–3000 s

Brake power DC brake: 30% * TN (without the brake option)

Ambient conditions Ambient operating temperature FR4-FR9 IL current:

-10 °C (-14 °F) (no frost)...+40 °C (104 °F)
IH current: -10 °C (-14 °F) (no frost)...+50 °C (122 °F)
FR10-FR11 Standalone (IP21/UL Type 1)
IH/IL: –10 °C (-14 °F) (no frost)…+40 °C (104 °F) (except 525–690 V,
0461 and 0590: –10 °C (-14 °F) (no frost)… +35 °C (95 °F))
FR10 Standalone (IP54/UL Type 12)
IH/IL: –10 °C (-14 °F) (no frost)…+40 °C (104 °F) (except 380–500 V,
0520, and 525–690 V, 0416: –10 °C (-14 °F) (no frost)…+35 °C (95 °F))
For higher ambient temperatures see Motor connection – Continuous
output current in this table.

Storage temperature -40 °C (-104 °F)...+70 °C (158 °F)

Relative humidity 0–95% RH, non-condensing, non-corrosive, no dripping water

Altitude 100% load capacity (no derating) up to 1000 m (3281 ft) 1% derating
for each 100 m (328 ft) above 1000 m (3281 ft)

164 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Technical item or function Technical data

Maximum altitudes:
• FR4–FR8:
- 208–240 V: 3000 m (9843 ft) (TN, TT, IT systems, and corner-
grounded networks*)
- 380–500 V: 3000 m (9843 ft) (TN, TT, and IT systems)
- 525–690 V: 2000 m (6562 ft) (TN, TT, and IT systems)
• FR9–FR11:
- 208–240 V: 3000 m (9843 ft) (TN, TT, IT systems, and corner-
grounded networks*)
- 380–500 V: 3000 m (9843 ft) (TN, TT, and IT systems)
- 380–500 V: 2000 m (6562 ft) (corner-grounded network **)
- 525–690 V: 2000 m (6562 ft) (TN, TT, and IT systems)
* Corner-grounded network is permitted for FR4–FR9 (Main voltage
208–240 V) up to 3000 m (see 6.2.1 Installation in a Corner-grounded
Network)
** Corner-grounded network is permitted for FR9–FR11 (Main voltage
380–500 V) up to 2000 m (see 6.2.1 Installation in a Corner-grounded
Network)

Ambient conditions Air quality: Designed according to

• chemical vapors • IEC 60721-3-3 Edition 2.2, AC drive in operation, class 3C3
• mechanical particles • IEC 60721-3-3 Edition 2.2, AC drive in operation, class 3S2

Vibration 5–150 Hz
IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Displacement amplitude 1 mm (peak) at 5–15.8 Hz (FR4–FR9)
IEC/EN 61800-5-1 Maximum acceleration amplitude 1 G at 15.8–150 Hz (FR4–FR9)
Displacement amplitude 0.25 mm (peak) at 5–31 Hz (FR10–FR11)
Maximum acceleration amplitude 0.25 G at 31–150 Hz (FR10–FR11)

Shock UPS Drop Test (for applicable UPS weights) Storage and shipping:
IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Maximum 15 G, 11 ms (in package)

Protection rating IP21 (UL Type 1) standard in entire kW/HP range (FR4–FR9 and FR10–
FR11 Standalone)
IP54 (UL Type 12) option in FR4- FR9 and FR10 Standalone. For IP54
(UL Type 12), a keypad is necessary.

Pollution degree PD2

EMC (at default set- Immunity Low frequency:

tings) Complies with IEC 61000-3-12, when RSCE >120 and In < 75 A
High frequency:
Complies with IEC/EN 61800-3 + A1, 1st and 2nd environment

Emissions Depend on EMC level. See Table 2.

Noise level Average noise level (cooling fan) The sound pressure depends on the cooling fan speed, which is con-
in dB(A) trolled in accordance with the drive temperature.
FR4: 44
FR5: 49
FR6–FR7: 57

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 165

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Technical item or function Technical data

FR8: 58
FR9–FR11: 76

Functional safety Hardware based ‘Safe Torque • EN 61800-5-2 Safe Torque Off (STO) SIL3
Off’ safety function to prevent
the drive from generating torque • EN ISO 13849-1 PL “e” Category 3
on the motor shaft. • EN 62061 SILCL3
STO safety function has been de- • IEC 61508 SIL3
signed for use in accordance
with the following standards • The function also corresponds to an uncontrolled stop in accord-
ance with stop category 0, EN 60204-1.
• EN 954-1, Category 3

SS1 safety function is realized in • EN 61800-5-2 Safe Stop 1 (SS1) SIL3

compliance with type C of the
drives safety standard • EN ISO 13849-1 PL "e" Category 3
EN61800-5-2 (Type C: “The • EN 62061 SILCL3
PDS(SR) initiates the motor de-
• IEC 61508 SIL3
celeration and initiates the STO
function after an application- • The function also corresponds to a controlled stop in accordance
specific time delay”). with stop category 1, EN60204-1.
SS1 safety function has been de-
signed for use in accordance
with the following standards:

ATEX thermistor input 94/9/EC, CE 0537 Ex 11 (2) GD

Approvals – CE, cULus, RCM, KC, EAC, UA. (See the nameplate of the drive for more
approvals.) Marine approvals: LR, BV, DNVGL, ABS, RMRS, CCS, KR, NK.

Efficiency – See http://ecosmart.danfoss.com/

Control connections Analog input voltage 0…+10 V, Ri = 200 kΩ, (–10 V…+10 V joystick control)
(apply to boards OP- Resolution 0.1% (VACON® NXP: 12-bit, VACON® NXS: 10-bit), accuracy
TA1, OPTA2, and ±1%
OPTA3)
Analog input current 0(4)-20 mA, Ri = 250 Ω differential

Digital inputs (6) Positive or negative logic; 18–30 V DC

Auxiliary voltage +24 V, ±10%, max volt. ripple < 100 mV rms; maximum 250 mA
Dimensioning: Maximum 1000 mA/control box (power back-up)

Output reference voltage +10 V, +3%, maximum load 10 mA

Analog output 0(4)–20 mA; RL maximum 500 Ω; Resolution 10 bit; Accuracy ±2%

Digital outputs Open collector output, 50 mA/48 V

Relay outputs 2 programmable change-over relay outputs

Switching capacity (resistive): 24 VDC/8 A, 250 VAC/8 A, 125 VDC/
0.4 A
Min.switching load: 5 V/10 mA

166 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Technical item or function Technical data

Protections Overvoltage trip limit The 240 volt drives: 437 V DC

The 500 volt drives: 911 V DC
The 690 volt drives: 1200 V DC

Undervoltage trip limit Mains voltage 240 V: 183 V DC.

Mains voltage 500 V: 333 V DC.
Mains voltage 690 V: 461 V DC.

Ground fault protection If there is a ground fault in the motor or motor cable, only the AC
drive is protected.

Mains supervision Trips if some of the input phases are missing

Motor phase supervision Trips if some of the output phases are missing

Overcurrent protection Yes

Unit overtemperature protection Yes

Motor overload protection Yes. (1)

The motor overload protection activates at 110% of the full load cur-
rent.

Motor stall protection Yes

Motor underload protection Yes

Short-circuit protection of +24 V Yes

and +10 V reference voltages

Drive enclosure ma- Paint color codes for the enclosure:

terials
• Dark grey = NCS 7010-R90B (Pantone 7546C)
• Blue = NCS S3020-B

1 For the motor thermal memory and the memory retention function to obey the UL 508C requirements, use the system software version
NXS00001V175, NXS00002V177, or NXP00002V186 or a newer version. If an older system software is used, install a motor overtemperature protec-
tion to comply with the UL regulations.

12.9 Brake Chopper Ratings

12.9.1 Brake Chopper Ratings

For brake chopper rating tables, see:
• 12.9.2 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 208–240 V
• 12.9.3 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 380–500 V
• 12.9.4 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 525–690 V
• 12.9.5 Internal Brake Resistors, FR4–FR6 (380–500 V)
For more information, see VACON® NX Brake Resistors User Manual.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 167

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.9.2 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 208–240 V

Table 57: Brake Chopper Ratings for VACON® NXS/NXSP AC Drives, Mains Voltage 208–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 3~

Enclosure size Drive type The minimum brake resistance [Ω] Brake power @405 V DC [kW]
(1)

FR4 0003 30 0.55

0004 30 0.75

0007 30 1.1

0008 30 1.5

0011 30 2.2

0012 30 3.0

FR5 0017 30 4.0

0025 30 5.5

0031 20 7.5

FR6 0048 10 11.0

0061 10 15.0

FR7 0075 3.3 22.0

0088 3.3 22.0

0114 3.3 30.0

FR8 0140 1.4 37.0

0170 1.4 45.0

0205 1.4 55.0

FR9 0261 1.4 75.0

0300 1.4 90.0

1
When using recommended resistor types. Peak power capability of the brake chopper can be calculated with DC-link voltage (Udc) and brake
resistor resistance Rb by Udc2/Rb.

168 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.9.3 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 380–500 V

Table 58: Brake Chopper Ratings for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drives, Mains Voltage 380–500 V, 50/60 Hz, 3~

Enclosure size Drive type The minimum brake resistance [Ω] Brake power @845 V DC [kW]
(1)

FR4 0003 63 1.5

0004 63 2.2

0005 63 3.0

0007 63 4.0

0009 63 5.5

0012 63 7.5

FR5 0016 63 11.0

0022 63 11.3

0031 42 17.0

FR6 0038 19 22.0

0045 19 30.0

0061 14 37.0

FR7 0072 6.5 45.0

0087 6.5 55.0

0105 6.5 75.0

FR8 0140 3.3 90.0

0168 3.3 110.0

0205 3.3 132.0

FR9 0261 2.5 160.0

0300 2.5 200.0

FR10 0385 1.4 250.0

0460 1.4 315.0

0520 1.4 355.0

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 169

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure size Drive type The minimum brake resistance [Ω] Brake power @845 V DC [kW]
(1)

FR11 0590 0.9 400.0

0650 0.9 450.0

0730 0.9 500.0

1 When using recommended resistor types. Peak power capability of the brake chopper can be calculated with DC-link voltage (Udc) and brake
resistor resistance Rb by Udc2/Rb; P=U2/R.

12.9.4 Brake Chopper Ratings for Mains Voltage 525–690 V

Table 59: Brake Chopper Ratings for VACON® NXS/NXP AC Drives, Mains Voltage 525–690 V, 50/60 Hz, 3~

Enclosure size Drive type The minimum brake resistance [Ω] Brake power @1166 V DC [kW]
(1)

FR6 0004 100 3.0

0005 100 4.0

0007 100 5.5

0010 100 7.5

0013 100 11.0

0018 30 15.0

0022 30 18.5

0027 30 22.0

0034 30 30.0

FR7 0041 18 37.5

0052 18 45.0

FR8 0062 9 55.0

0080 9 75.0

0100 9 90.0

FR9 0125 6.7 110.0

0144 6.7 132.0

0170 6.7 160.0

0208 6.7 194.2

170 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Enclosure size Drive type The minimum brake resistance [Ω] Brake power @1166 V DC [kW]
(1)

FR10 0261 2.5 250.0

0325 2.5 315.0

0385 2.5 355.0

0416 2.5 400.0

FR11 0460 1.7 450.0

0502 1.7 500.0

0590 1.7 560.0

1 When using recommended resistor types. Peak power capability of the brake chopper can be calculated with DC-link voltage (Udc) and brake

resistor resistance Rb by Udc2/Rb.

12.9.5 Internal Brake Resistors, FR4–FR6 (380–500 V)

The enclosure sizes FR4, FR5, and FR6 (380–500 V) can be equipped with an internal brake resistor as a factory option. The brake
resistors are designed for a 2 s full torque braking from nominal motor speed to zero or a 1 s full power braking every minute.

Table 60: Internal Brake Resistors, FR4–FR6

Enclosure size Resistance [Ω] Energy 2 s full torque braking [kJ] Average power 1 pulse/min [W]

FR4 (380–500 V) 120 4 45

FR5 (380–500 V) 55 8.9 100

FR6 (380–500 V) 30 16 175

e30bh834.10

1.20

1.00

0.80

0.60

0.40

0.20

0.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 A

A Time (s)

Illustration 76: Relative Power Handling Capability of Internal Resistors

12.10 Faults and Alarms

12.10.1 Fault 1 - Overcurrent, Subcode S1- Hardware trip

Cause
There is too high a current in the motor cable. Its cause can be 1 of the following:
• a sudden heavy load increase
• a short circuit in the motor cables
• the motor is not the correct type

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 171

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor.
• Check the cables and connections.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.2 Fault 1 - Overcurrent, Subcode S2 - Current cutter supervision (VACON® NXS)

Cause
There is too high a current in the motor cable. Its cause can be 1 of the following:
• a sudden heavy load increase
• a short circuit in the motor cables
• the motor is not the correct type
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor.
• Check the cables and connections.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.3 Fault 1 - Overcurrent, Subcode S3 - Current limit controller supervision

Cause
There is too high a current in the motor cable. Its cause can be 1 of the following:
• a sudden heavy load increase
• a short circuit in the motor cables
• the motor is not the correct type
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor.
• Check the cables and connections.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.4 Fault 1 - Overcurrent, Subcode S4 - Software-based overcurrent fault

Cause
There is too high a current in the motor cable. Its cause can be 1 of the following:
• a sudden heavy load increase
• a short circuit in the motor cables
• the motor is not the correct type
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor.
• Check the cables and connections.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.5 Fault 2 - Overvoltage, Subcode S1 - Hardware trip

Cause
The DC-link voltage is higher than the limits.
• Too short a deceleration time
• High overvoltage spikes in the supply
• Start/Stop sequence too fast

172 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Use the brake chopper or the brake resistor. They are available as options.
• Activate the overvoltage controller.
• Do a check of the input voltage.

12.10.6 Fault 2 - Overvoltage, Subcode S2 - Overvoltage control supervision

Cause
The DC-link voltage is higher than the limits.
• Too short a deceleration time
• High overvoltage spikes in the supply
• Motor load is generative
• Start/Stop sequence too fast
Troubleshooting
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Use the brake chopper or the brake resistor. They are available as options.
• Activate the overvoltage controller.
• Do a check of the input voltage.

12.10.7 Fault 3 - Earth fault

Cause
The measurement of current tells that the sum of the motor phase current is not zero.
• Insulation malfunction in the cables or in the motor.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the motor cables and the motor.

12.10.8 Fault 5 - Charging switch

Cause
The charging switch is open, when the START command is given.
• Operation malfunction
• Defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.9 Fault 6 - Emergency stop

Cause
Stop signal has been given from the option board.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the emergency stop circuit.

12.10.10 Fault 7 - Saturation trip

Cause
• defective component
• brake resistor short circuit or overload

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 173

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
This fault cannot be reset from the control panel.
• Switch off the power.
• DO NOT RESTART THE DRIVE or CONNECT THE POWER!
• Ask instructions from the factory. If this fault shows at the same time with Fault 1, do a check of the motor cable and the motor.

12.10.11 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S1 - ASIC phase feedback

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.12 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S4 - ASIC trip

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.13 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S5 - Disturbance in VaconBus

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.14 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S6 - Feedback of charging switch

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.15 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S7 - Charging switch

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

174 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.10.16 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S8 - No power to driver card

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.17 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S9 - Power unit communication (TX)

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.18 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S10 - Power unit communication (Trip)
Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.19 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S11 - Power unit comm. (Measurement)
Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.20 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S12 - System bus fault (slot D or E)
Cause
Error in system bus option board (OPTD1 or OPTD2) in slot D or E.
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.
• Check the cables and connections.

12.10.21 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S30 - OPTAF: STO channels are different from each other
Cause
The Safe Disable inputs are in different states. It is not allowed according to EN954-1, category 3. This fault occurs when the Safe
Disable inputs are in different states for more than 5 s.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 175

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
• Check the S1 switch.
• Check the cabling to the OPTAF board.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.22 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S31 - OPTAF: Thermistor short circuit detected
Cause
Thermistor short circuit detected.
Troubleshooting
• Correct the cable connections.
• Check the jumper for the thermistor short circuit supervision, if the thermistor function is not used and the thermistor input is
short-circuited.

12.10.23 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S32 - OPTAF board has been removed
Cause
OPTAF board has been removed. It is not allowed to remove the OPTAF board once the software has recognized it.
Troubleshooting
The system requires a manual acknowledgement using System menu parameter 6.5.5 OPTAF Remove. Ask help from the local dis-
tributor.

12.10.24 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S33 - OPTAF: EEPROM error

Cause
OPTAF board EEPROM error (checksum, not answering and so on).
Troubleshooting
Change the OPTAF board.

12.10.25 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S34 - OPTAF: Voltage problem

Cause
OPTAF supply voltage hardware problem detected.
Troubleshooting
Change the OPTAF board.

12.10.26 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S35 - OPTAF: Overvoltage

Cause
OPTAF supply voltage hardware problem detected.
Troubleshooting
Change the OPTAF board.

12.10.27 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S36 - OPTAF: Undervoltage

Cause
OPTAF supply voltage hardware problem detected.
Troubleshooting
Change the OPTAF board.

12.10.28 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S37 - OPTAF: Test pulse is not detected in both STO chan-
nels
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in Safe Disable inputs.
Troubleshooting
• Change the OPTAF board.
• Change the control board.

12.10.29 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S38 - OPTAF: Test pulse is not detected in STO channel 1
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in Safe Disable inputs.

176 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
• Change the OPTAF board.
• Change the control board.

12.10.30 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S39 - OPTAF: Test pulse is not detected in STO channel 2
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in Safe Disable inputs.
Troubleshooting
• Change the OPTAF board.
• Change the control board.

12.10.31 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S40 - OPTAF: ASIC trip ETR is not set, even if STO channel 1
is active
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in Safe Disable inputs.
Troubleshooting
• Change the OPTAF board.
• Change the control board.

12.10.32 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S41 - OPTAF: STO channels are not active when the ther-
mistor trip is active
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in the thermistor input.
Troubleshooting
Change the OPTAF board.

12.10.33 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S42 - OPTAF: Test pulse low is not detected on thermistor
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in the thermistor input.
Troubleshooting
Change the OPTAF board.

12.10.34 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S43 - OPTAF: Test pulse high is not detected on thermistor
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in the thermistor input.
Troubleshooting
Change the OPTAF board.

12.10.35 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S44 - OPTAF: STO channel 1 is not active, even if the ana-
log input supervision indicates
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in Safe Disable inputs or in the thermistor input.
Troubleshooting
• Change the OPTAF board.
• Change the control board.

12.10.36 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S45 - OPTAF: STO channel 2 is not active, even if the ana-
log input supervision indicates
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in Safe Disable inputs or in the thermistor input.
Troubleshooting
• Change the OPTAF board.
• Change the control board.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 177

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.10.37 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S46 - OPTAF: Thermistor or analog input is not set, even if
STO is active
Cause
Single hardware problem detected in Safe Disable inputs or in the thermistor input.
Troubleshooting
• Change the OPTAF board.
• Change the control board.

12.10.38 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S47 - OPTAF: Board mounted in old NXP control board
with no safety hardware
Cause
OPTAF board mounted in old VACON® NXP control board, which is not equipped with the Safe Disable function.
Troubleshooting
Change the control board to VB00561 revision H or newer.

12.10.39 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S48 - OPTAF: Mismatch between Therm Trip (HW) parame-
ter and jumper setting
Cause
The parameter Expander boards/ SlotB/ Therm Trip(HW) is set to OFF even though the jumper X12 is not cut.
Troubleshooting
Correct the parameter 7.2.1.1 Therm Trip (HW) to match the X12 jumper setting.

12.10.40 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S49 - OPTAF: Board mounted in VACON NXS control board
Cause
OPTAF is only compatible with VACON® NXP.
Troubleshooting
Remove the OPTAF board.

12.10.41 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S50 - OPTAF: Filter discharge resistor fault
Cause
Problem with the control board.
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.42 Fault 8 - System fault, Subcode S70 - False fault activated

Cause
Fault in application.
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.43 Fault 9 - Undervoltage, Subcode S1 - DC-link too low during run

Cause
The DC-link voltage is lower than the limits.
• Too low a supply voltage
• AC drive internal fault
• A defective input fuse
• The external charge switch is not closed.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• If there is a temporary supply voltage break, reset the fault and start the drive again.
• Do a check of the supply voltage. If the supply voltage is sufficient, there is an internal fault.
• Ask instructions from the local distributor.

178 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.10.44 Fault 9 - Undervoltage, Subcode S2 - No data from power unit

Cause
The DC-link voltage is lower than the limits.
• Too low a supply voltage
• AC drive internal fault
• a defective input fuse
• the external charge switch is not closed.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• If there is a temporary supply voltage break, reset the fault and start the drive again.
• Do a check of the supply voltage. If the supply voltage is sufficient, there is an internal fault.
• Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.45 Fault 9 - Undervoltage, Subcode S3 - Undervoltage control supervision

Cause
The DC-link voltage is lower than the limits.
• Too low a supply voltage
• AC drive internal fault
• A defective input fuse
• The external charge switch is not closed.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• If there is a temporary supply voltage break, reset the fault and start the drive again.
• Do a check of the supply voltage. If the supply voltage is sufficient, there is an internal fault.
• Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.46 Fault 10 - Input line supervision, Subcode S1 - Phase supervision diode supply
Cause
The input line phase is missing.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the supply voltage, the fuses, and supply cable.

12.10.47 Fault 11 - Output phase supervision, Subcode S1 - Common output phase supervision
Cause
The measurement of current tells that there is no current in 1 motor phase.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the motor cable and the motor.

12.10.48 Fault 11 - Output phase supervision, Subcode S2 - Additional closed loop control output
phase fault
Cause
The measurement of current tells that there is no current in 1 motor phase.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the motor cable and the motor.

12.10.49 Fault 11 - Output phase supervision, Subcode S3 - Additional open loop control output
phase fault during start DC brake
Cause
The measurement of current tells that there is no current in 1 motor phase.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 179

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the motor cable and the motor.

12.10.50 Fault 11 - Output phase supervision, Subcode S4 - Additional closed loop output phase
fault during PM StartAngleID run
Cause
The measurement of current tells that there is no current in 1 motor phase.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the motor cable and the motor.

12.10.51 Fault 12 - Brake chopper supervision

Cause
• There is no brake resistor.
• The brake resistor is broken.
• A defective brake chopper.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the brake resistor and the cabling.
• If they are in good condition, there is a fault in the resistor or the brake chopper. Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.52 Fault 13 - AC drive undertemperature

Cause
Too low a temperature in the heat sink of the power unit or in the power board. The heat sink temperature is below -10 °C (14 °F).
Troubleshooting
Add an external heater near the AC drive.

12.10.53 Fault 14 - AC drive overtemperature, Subcode S1 - Overtemperature warning in unit,

board, or phases
Cause
Overheating detected in AC drive.
Heat sink temperature is over 90 °C (194 °F). Overtemperature alarm is issued when the heat sink temperature goes over 85 °C
(185 °F).
In 525–690 V, FR6: Heat sink temperature is over 77 ºC (170.6 °F). Overtemperature alarm is issued when the heat sink temperature
goes over 72 ºC (161.6 °F).
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the actual amount and flow of cooling air.
• Examine the heat sink for dust.
• Do a check of the ambient temperature.
• Make sure that the switching frequency is not too high in relation to the ambient temperature and the motor load.
• For FR10-FR11 Standalone: check door filters, and clean or replace if needed.

12.10.54 Fault 14 - AC drive overtemperature, Subcode S2 - Overtemperature in power board

Cause
Overheating detected in AC drive.
Heat sink temperature is over 90 °C (194 °F). Overtemperature alarm is issued when the heat sink temperature goes over 85 °C
(185 °F).
In 525–690 V, FR6: Heat sink temperature is over 77 ºC (170.6 °F). Overtemperature alarm is issued when the heat sink temperature
goes over 72 ºC (161.6 °F).
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the actual amount and flow of cooling air.
• Examine the heat sink for dust.

180 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

• Do a check of the ambient temperature.

• Make sure that the switching frequency is not too high in relation to the ambient temperature and the motor load.
• For FR10-FR11 Standalone: check door filters, and clean or replace if needed.

12.10.55 Fault 14 - AC drive overtemperature, Subcode S4 - Overtemperature on ASIC board or

driver boards
Cause
Overheating detected in AC drive.
Heat sink temperature is over 90 °C (194 °F). Overtemperature alarm is issued when the heat sink temperature goes over 85 °C
(185 °F).
In 525–690 V, FR6: Heat sink temperature is over 77 ºC (170.6 °F). Overtemperature alarm is issued when the heat sink temperature
goes over 72 ºC (161.6 °F).
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the actual amount and flow of cooling air.
• Examine the heat sink for dust.
• Do a check of the ambient temperature.
• Make sure that the switching frequency is not too high in relation to the ambient temperature and the motor load.
• For FR10-FR11 Standalone: check door filters, and clean or replace if needed.

12.10.56 Fault 15 - Motor stalled

Cause
The motor stalled.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• Check the motor and the load.
• Insufficient motor power, check motor stall protection parameterization.

12.10.57 Fault 16 - Motor overtemperature

Cause
There is too heavy a load on the motor.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• Decrease the motor load.
• If there is no motor overload, do a check of the temperature model parameters.

12.10.58 Fault 17 - Motor underload

Cause
Motor underload protection has tripped.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check underload protection parameterization.

12.10.59 Fault 18 - Unbalance, Subcode S1 - Current unbalance

Cause
Unbalance between power modules in paralleled power units.
This fault is type A fault (Alarm).
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 181

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.10.60 Fault 18 - Unbalance, Subcode S2 - DC voltage unbalance

Cause
Unbalance between power modules in paralleled power units.
This fault is type A fault (Alarm).
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.61 Fault 19 - Current overload

Cause
Motor current overload warning.
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.62 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S1 - Firmware interface power down variable check-
sum error
Cause
Parameter save fault.
• Operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.63 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S2 - Firmware interface variable check sum error
Cause
Parameter save fault.
• Operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.64 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S3 - System power down variable check sum error
Cause
Parameter save fault.
• Operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.65 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S4 - System parameter checksum error

Cause
Parameter save fault.
• Operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.66 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S5 - Application-defined power-down, variable check-

sum error
Cause
Parameter save fault.
• Operation malfunction
• defective component

182 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.67 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S6 - Application-defined power-down, variable check-

sum
Cause
Parameter save fault.
• Operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.68 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S10 - System parameter checksum error
Cause
Parameter save fault.
• Operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
If the fault occurs again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.69 Fault 22 - Parameter fault, Subcode S13 - Checksum error in application-specific parame-
ter set
Cause
Parameter save fault.
Troubleshooting
• Recommission the application.
• Check parameters.

12.10.70 Fault 24 - Counter fault

Cause
Values that showed on the counters are incorrect.
Troubleshooting
Have a critical attitude towards values shown on counters.

12.10.71 Fault 25 - Microprocessor watchdog fault, Subcode S1 - CPU watchdog timer

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.72 Fault 25 - Microprocessor watchdog fault, Subcode S2 - ASIC reset

Cause
• operation malfunction
• defective component
Troubleshooting
• Reset the fault and start the drive again.
• If the fault shows again, ask instructions from the local distributor.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 183

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.10.73 Fault 26 - Start-up prevented, Subcode S1 - Prevention of accidental start-up

Cause
Start-up of the drive has been prevented. Run request is ON when new application is downloaded to the drive.
Troubleshooting
• Cancel prevention of start-up if it can be done safely.
• Remove Run request.

12.10.74 Fault 26 - Start-up prevented, Subcode S2 - RUN request is kept active after drive returns
to READY state from safe state
Cause
Start-up of the drive has been prevented. START command is ON when returning to READY state after Safe Disable has been active.
Troubleshooting
• Cancel prevention of start-up if it can be done safely.
• Remove Run request.

12.10.75 Fault 26 - Start-up prevented, Subcode S30 - RUN request given too quickly
Cause
Start-up of the drive has been prevented. START command is ON after system software or application was downloaded, or after
application was changed.
Troubleshooting
• Cancel prevention of start-up if it can be done safely.
• Remove Run request.

12.10.76 Fault 29 - Thermistor fault, Subcode S1 - Thermistor input activated on OPTAF board
Cause
The thermistor input of option board has detected increase of the motor temperature.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the motor cooling and loading.
• Do a check of the thermistor connection.
• (If thermistor input of the option board is not in use it has to be short-circuited).

12.10.77 Fault 29 - Thermistor fault, Subcode S2 - Special application

Cause
The thermistor input of option board has detected increase of the motor temperature.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the motor cooling and loading.
• Do a check of the thermistor connection.
• (If thermistor input of the option board is not in use it has to be short-circuited).

12.10.78 Fault 30 - Safe disable

Cause
The input on OPTAF board has opened.
STO inputs SD1 and SD2 are activated through the OPTAF option board.
Troubleshooting
Cancel Safe Disable if it can be done safely.

12.10.79 Fault 31 - IGBT temperature (hardware)

Cause
IGBT Inverter Bridge overtemperature protection has detected too high a short-term overload current.

184 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor frame size.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.80 Fault 32 - Fan cooling

Cause
Cooling fan of the AC drive does not start, when ON command is given.
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.81 Fault 34 - CAN bus communication

Cause
Sent message not acknowledged.
Troubleshooting
Make sure that there is another device on the bus with the same configuration.

12.10.82 Fault 35 - Application

Cause
Problem in application software.
Troubleshooting
• Ask instructions from the local distributor.
• For an application programmer: do a check of the application program.

12.10.83 Fault 36 - Control unit

Cause
• The software needs newer version of the control unit.
Troubleshooting
• Change the control unit.

12.10.84 Fault 37 - Device changed (same type), Subcode S1 - Control board

Cause
A new option board has replaced the old one in the same slot. The parameters are available in the drive.
Troubleshooting
Reset the fault. The device is ready for use. The drive starts to use the old parameter settings.

12.10.85 Fault 38 - Device added (same type), Subcode S1 - Control board

Cause
The option board was added. The same option board has been used in the same slot before. The parameters are available in the
drive.
Troubleshooting
Reset the fault. The device is ready for use. The drive starts to use the old parameter settings.

12.10.86 Fault 39 - Device removed

Cause
An option board was removed from the slot.
Troubleshooting
The device is not available. Reset the fault.

12.10.87 Fault 40 - Device unknown, Subcode S1 - Unknown device

Cause
An unknown or mismatching device was connected (the power unit or option board).
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 185

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.10.88 Fault 40 - Device unknown, Subcode S2 - StarCoupler: power sub units are not identical
Cause
An unknown or mismatching device was connected (the power unit or option board).
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.89 Fault 40 - Device unknown, Subcode S3 - StarCoupler is not compatible with the control
board
Cause
An unknown or mismatching device was connected (the power unit or option board).
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.90 Fault 40 - Device unknown, Subcode S4 - Wrong PropertiesType in control board EEPROM
Cause
An unknown or mismatching device was connected (the power unit or option board).
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.91 Fault 40 - Device unknown, Subcode S5 - Wrong VACON® NXP control board EEPROM size
detected
Cause
An unknown or mismatching device was connected (the power unit or option board).
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.92 Fault 40 - Device unknown, Subcode S6 - Old power unit (Asic) and new software mis-
match
Cause
An unknown or mismatching device was connected (the power unit or option board).
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.93 Fault 40 - Device unknown, Subcode S7 - Old ASIC detected

Cause
An unknown or mismatching device was connected (the power unit or option board).
Troubleshooting
Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.94 Fault 41 - IGBT temperature, Subcode S1 - Calculated IGBT temperature too high
Cause
IGBT Inverter Bridge overtemperature protection has detected too high a short-term overload current.
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor frame size.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.95 Fault 41 - IGBT temperature, Subcode S3 - Calculated IGBT temperature too high (long-
term protection)
Cause
IGBT Inverter Bridge overtemperature protection has detected too high a short-term overload current.

186 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor frame size.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.96 Fault 41 - IGBT temperature, Subcode S4 - Peak current too high

Cause
IGBT Inverter Bridge overtemperature protection has detected too high a short-term overload current.
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor frame size.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.97 Fault 41 - IGBT temperature, Subcode S5 - BCU: Filtered current too high for some time
Cause
IGBT Inverter Bridge overtemperature protection has detected too high a short-term overload current.
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor frame size.
• Make an identification run.

12.10.98 Fault 41 - IGBT temperature, Subcode S6 - BCU: Current momentarily too high
Cause
IGBT Inverter Bridge overtemperature protection has detected too high a short-term overload current.
Troubleshooting
• Check the load.
• Check the motor frame size.
• Make an identification run.
• Check brake resistor resistance.

12.10.99 Fault 42 - Brake resistor overtemperature, Subcode S1 - Internal brake chopper overtem-
perature
Cause
Brake resistor overtemperature protection has detected too heavy braking.
Troubleshooting
• Reset unit.
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Dimensioning of the brake chopper is not correct.
• Use external brake resistor.

12.10.100 Fault 42 - Brake resistor overtemperature, Subcode S2 - Brake resistance too high (BCU)
Cause
Brake resistor overtemperature protection has detected too heavy braking.
Troubleshooting
• Reset unit.
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Dimensioning of the brake chopper is not correct.
• Use external brake resistor.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 187

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

12.10.101 Fault 42 - Brake resistor overtemperature, Subcode S3 - Brake resistance too low (BCU)
Cause
Brake resistor overtemperature protection has detected too heavy braking.
Troubleshooting
• Reset unit.
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Dimensioning of the brake chopper is not correct.
• Use external brake resistor.

12.10.102 Fault 42 - Brake resistor overtemperature, Subcode S4 - Brake resistance not detected
(BCU)
Cause
Brake resistor overtemperature protection has detected too heavy braking.
Troubleshooting
• Reset unit.
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Dimensioning of the brake chopper is not correct.
• Use external brake resistor.

12.10.103 Fault 42 - Brake resistor overtemperature, Subcode S5 - Brake resistance leakage (earth
fault) (BCU)
Cause
Brake resistor overtemperature protection has detected too heavy braking.
Troubleshooting
• Reset unit.
• Set the deceleration time longer.
• Dimensioning of the brake chopper is not correct.
• Use external brake resistor.

12.10.104 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S1 - Encoder 1 channel A is missing

Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.
Encoder channel A is missing.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the encoder connections.
• Do a check of the option board.
• Measure the encoder pulses.
- If the pulses are correct, the option board is faulty.
- If the pulses are not correct, the encoder/cabling is faulty.

12.10.105 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S2 - Encoder 1 channel B is missing

Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.
Encoder channel B is missing.

188 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the encoder connections.
• Do a check of the option board.
• Measure the encoder pulses.
- If the pulses are correct, the option board is faulty.
- If the pulses are not correct, the encoder/cabling is faulty.

12.10.106 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S3 - Both encoder 1 channels are missing
Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.
Encoder channels A and B are missing.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the encoder connections.
• Do a check of the option board.
• Measure the encoder pulses.
- If the pulses are correct, the option board is faulty.
- If the pulses are not correct, the encoder/cabling is faulty.

12.10.107 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S4 - Encoder reversed

Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.
The encoder is reversed. The output frequency has been set to the positive value, but the encoder signal is negative.
Troubleshooting
Change the frequency value polarity so that the encoder signal is positive. With some encoders, interchanging the encoder chan-
nels can be used to change the indicated rotation direction.

12.10.108 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S5 - Encoder board missing

Cause
The encoder board is missing.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the encoder board.
• Do a check of the terminals.
• Do a check of the board connections.

12.10.109 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S6 - Serial communication fault

Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.
Serial communication fault. The encoder cable is not connected or there are interferences in the cable.
Troubleshooting
• Check cabling between encoder and OPTBE, especially Data and Clock signals.
• Check that actual encoder type matches with OPTBE “Operating mode” parameter.

12.10.110 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S7 - Ch A / Ch B Mismatch

Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.
Encoder channels A and B are mismatched.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the cable connections and terminals.

12.10.111 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S8 - Resolver/Motor pole pair mismatch

Cause
Problem detected in parameterization of option board.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 189

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

There is a mismatch of the resolver/ motor pole pair number. Resolver pole pair number (if >1) is not matching the motor pole pair
number.
Troubleshooting
Check that OPTBC parameter “Resolver Poles” and possible Gear Ratio parameters in application match motor pole count.

12.10.112 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S9 - Missed Start Angle

Cause
Encoder zero positioning identification run has not been made.
The encoder start angle is missing.
Troubleshooting
Make encoder identification run.

12.10.113 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S10 - Sin/Cos encoder feedback is missing
Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.
For the closed loop control, encoder modes "EnDat only" or "SSI only" (absolute channel only) are not allowed.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the wiring, jumper settings, and encoder mode.
• Change OPTBE “Operating mode” parameter is either "EnDat+SinCos", "SSI+SinCos" or "SinCos only", or avoid using closed loop
control.

12.10.114 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S11 - Encoder angle is drifting

Cause
Error angle between the angle read from the absolute channel and the angle calculated from the incremental channels.
Troubleshooting
• Check the encoder cable, cable shield, and grounding of the cable shield.
• Check the mechanical mounting of the encoder and make sure that the encoder is not slipping.
• Check the encoder parameters (for example, encoder ppr).

12.10.115 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S12 - Dual speed supervision fault
Cause
Encoder speed supervision. The difference between the encoder speed and estimated speed is too large. Dual speed supervision:
Estimated speed and encoder speed difference is too high (0.05 x fn or minimum motor nominal slip frequency). See variable Esti-
matedShaftFrequency.
Troubleshooting
• Check the encoder speed signal ShaftFrequency vs. EstimatedShaftFrequency.
• If the ShaftFrequency is incorrect, check the encoder, cable, and encoder parameters.
• If the EstimatedShaftFrequency is incorrect, check the motor parameters.

12.10.116 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S13 - Encoder angle supervision fault
Cause
The estimated shaft position error (estimated angle - encoder angle) is more than 90° electrical.
See variable EstimatedAngleError.
Troubleshooting
• Repeat the encoder ID run (absolute encoders).
• Check the mechanical mounting of the encoder and make sure that the encoder is not slipping.
• Check the encoder ppr number.
• Check the encoder cable.

12.10.117 Fault 43 - Encoder fault, Subcode S14 - Encoder estimated missing pulse fault, switch
from the CL ctrl to the OL sensorl
Cause
Problem detected in encoder signals.

190 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Software has detected too many missing pulses in the encoder. Closed loop control is switched to sensorless open loop control.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the encoder.
• Do a check of the encoder cable, cable shield, and grounding of the cable shield.
• Do a check of the mechanical mounting of the encoder.
• Do a check of the encoder parameters.

12.10.118 Fault 44 - Device changed (different type), Subcode S1 - Control board

Cause
• Option board or power unit changed.
• New device of different type or different power rating.
Troubleshooting
• Reset.
• If option board was changed, set the option board parameters again.
• If power unit was changed, set AC drive parameters again.

12.10.119 Fault 45 - Device added (different type), Subcode S1 - Control board

Cause
Option board of different type added.
Troubleshooting
• Reset.
• Set the power unit parameters again.

12.10.120 Fault 49 - Division by zero in application

Cause
Division by zero has occurred in application program.
Troubleshooting
• If the fault shows again while the AC drive is in run state, ask instructions from the local distributor.
• For an application programmer: do a check of the application program.

12.10.121 Fault 50 - Analogue input Iin < 4 mA (sel. signal range 4 to 20 mA)
Cause
Current at the analog input is < 4 mA.
• Control cable is broken or loose
• signal source has failed.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the current loop circuitry.

12.10.122 Fault 51 - External fault

Cause
Digital input fault.
Digital input has been programmed as external fault input and this input is active.
Troubleshooting
• Check the programming.
• Check the device which the error message indicates.
• Check the cabling for the respective device.

12.10.123 Fault 52 - Keypad communication fault

Cause
The connection between the control panel (or VACON® NCDrive) and the drive is defective.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 191

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
Do a check of the control panel connection and the control panel cable.

12.10.124 Fault 53 - Fieldbus fault

Cause
The data connection between the fieldbus master and the fieldbus board is defective.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the installation and fieldbus master.
• If the installation is correct, ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.125 Fault 54 - Slot fault

Cause
Defective option board or slot.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the board and slot.
• Ask instructions from the local distributor.

12.10.126 Fault 56 - Measured Temperature

Cause
Shows temperature measurement fault for option board OPTBH or OPTB8.
• Temperature exceeded set limit.
• Sensor disconnected.
• Short circuit.
Troubleshooting
Find the cause of temperature rise.

12.10.127 Fault 57 - Identification

Cause
Identification run has failed.
This fault is type A fault (Alarm).
Troubleshooting
• Run command was removed before completion of identification run.
• The motor is not connected to the AC drive.
• There is load on motor shaft.

12.10.128 Fault 58 - Brake

Cause
Actual status of the brake is different from the control signal.
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the mechanical brake state and connections.

12.10.129 Fault 59 - Follower communication

Cause
SystemBus or CAN communication is broken between Master and Follower.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the option board parameters.
• Do a check of the optical fiber cable or CAN cable.

12.10.130 Fault 60 - Cooling

Cause
External cooling has failed.
Normally this fault comes from the heat exchanger unit.

192 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Specifications

Troubleshooting
Do a check of the reason for the failure on the external system.

12.10.131 Fault 61 - Speed error

Cause
Motor speed is unequal to reference.
Troubleshooting
• Do a check of the encoder connection.
• PMS motor has exceeded the pull-out torque.

12.10.132 Fault 62 - Run disable

Cause
Run enable signal is low.
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the reason for the Run enable signal.

12.10.133 Fault 63 - Quick stop

Cause
Command for quick stop received from digital input or fieldbus.
This fault is type A fault (Alarm).
Troubleshooting
Reset the fault.

12.10.134 Fault 64 - Input switch open

Cause
Drive input switch is open.
This fault is type A fault (Alarm)
Troubleshooting
Do a check of the main power switch of the drive.

12.10.135 Fault 65 - Measured Temperature

Cause
Shows temperature measurement fault for option board OPTBH or OPTB8.
• Temperature exceeded set limit.
• Sensor disconnected.
• Short circuit.
Troubleshooting
Find the cause of temperature rise or sensor malfunction.

12.10.136 Fault 70 - Active filter fault

Cause
Fault triggered by digital input (see param. P2.2.7.33).
It is possible to set different responses in the application for this fault. See parameter group Protections.
Troubleshooting
Remove fault situation on active filter.

12.10.137 Fault 74 - Follower fault

Cause
When using normal Master Follower function this fault code is given if one or more follower drives trips to fault.
Troubleshooting
Correct the fault cause on follower and reset fault.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910 | 193

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Index

Index
+ Display, contrast.........................................................................................113
+24 V control voltage output.................................................................. 89 Disposal............................................................................................................10
+24 V DC external power...........................................................................87 Down from keypad....................................................................................109

A E
EMC class......................................................................................................... 22
Accessories bag.............................................................................................28
EMC jumpers.................................................................................................. 81
Active faults menu.....................................................................................103
EMC protection level...................................................................................81
Application information..........................................................................117
EMC-compliant installation...................................................................... 40
Application selection................................................................................108
Enclosure size................................................................................................ 19
Approvals and certifications.....................................................................10
Environment requirements...................................................................... 32
Automatic parameter back-up..............................................................109
Expander board menu............................................................................. 118
Expander boards page.............................................................................118
B External controller........................................................................................16
Brake chopper ratings........................................................... 168, 169, 170
Brake resistor cable......................................................................................40 F
Brake resistor terminal................................................................................40
Fan control................................................................................................... 114
Fault history menu.................................................................................... 104
C Fault time data record.................................................................... 103, 103
Cable accessories............................................................................60, 63, 66 Fault types.................................................................................................... 128
Cable requirements....................................................................... 38, 39, 39 Faults.............................................................................................................. 128
Cable sizes........................................................................146, 148, 150, 151 Faults, resetting of..................................................................................... 128
Cable sizes, North America.........................................147, 149, 151, 152 Fuse..................................................................................................... 39, 39, 39
Cable stripping........................................................................................... 152 Fuse sizes..........................................................................146, 148, 150, 151
Cables, distance between......................................................................... 60 Fuse sizes, North America...........................................147, 149, 151, 152
Capacitors, reforming of..........................................................................126
Changing the rotation direction.......................................................... 101 G
Commissioning...........................................................................................121
Galvanic isolation barriers.........................................................................94
Commissioning, checks after.................................................................122
Grounding principle....................................................................................41
Commissioning, safety.............................................................................120
Control cable..................................................................................................88
Control mode.............................................................................................. 101 H
Control mode, keypad............................................................................. 102 Hardware information..............................................................................117
Control panel.......................................................................................... 24, 95 Hardware settings menu.........................................................................114
Control panel,error message................................................................. 129 High altitude installation........................................................................... 32
Control terminals, OPTA1..........................................................................88 High overload..............................................................................................155
Control terminals, OPTA2..........................................................................92 HMI acknowledge timeout.....................................................................115
Control terminals, OPTA3..........................................................................92
Control unit components..........................................................................87 I
Cooling.............................................................................................................33
Identification run....................................................................................... 123
Cooling space......................................................................................... 33, 35
Installation environment........................................................................... 32
Copy parameters........................................................................................108
Installing the Cables, FR10 Standalone................................................ 72
Copying frequency reference set.........................................................102
Installing the Cables, FR11 Standalone................................................ 76
Corner-grounded network........................................................................41
Installing the cables, FR4–FR6................................................................. 60
Covers, tightening torques.....................................................................154
Installing the cables, FR7/FI7....................................................................63
Installing the cables, FR8/FI8....................................................................66
D Installing the Cables, FR9...........................................................................69
Debug menu................................................................................................118 Insulation checks........................................................................................121
Default page................................................................................................ 113 Intended use........................................................................................... 16, 16
Digital input signal inversion................................................................... 90 Internal brake resistor.............................................................................. 171
Dimensions, flange mounting FR4–FR6............................................ 138 Internal brake resistor connection.......................................................114
Dimensions, flange mounting FR7–FR8............................................ 140
Dimensions, flange mounting FR9...................................................... 142 J
Dimensions, FR10–FR11.......................................................................... 144
Jumper selections, OPTA1.........................................................................91
Dimensions, FR7.........................................................................................133
Jumper X10-1.................................................................................................83
Dimensions, FR8.........................................................................................135
Dimensions, FR9.........................................................................................137
Dimensions,FR4–FR6................................................................................ 131 K
Display indications.......................................................................................26 Keypad..............................................................................................................24
Display, backlight.......................................................................................114 Keypad control menu...............................................................................100

194 | Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910

VACON® NXS/NXP Air-cooled

Operating Guide Index

Keypad control parameters....................................................................100 S

Keypad reference.......................................................................................101 Safety......................................................................................................... 12, 13
Keypad settings menu............................................................................. 113 Security menu............................................................................................. 110
Service Info file............................................................................................128
L Sine filter parameter................................................................................. 115
Language selection...................................................................................108 Software information............................................................................... 117
Lifting the product.......................................................................................30 Start-up quick guide....................................................................................11
Low overload...............................................................................................155 Start-up test................................................................................................. 123
Start-up wizard........................................................................................... 112
M Stop motor function................................................................................. 102
Storage.............................................................................................................29
Maintenance................................................................................................124 Surveillance.................................................................................................... 16
Menu structure..............................................................................................27 Symbols........................................................................................................... 12
Monitored values..........................................................................................95 System feedback...........................................................................................16
Monitoring menu......................................................................................... 95 System info menu......................................................................................116
Motor overload protection....................................................................... 16 System menu...............................................................................................105
Motor status................................................................................................... 16 System menu functions...........................................................................105
Multimonitoring items.............................................................................112

T
O
Technical data............................................................................................. 163
Option boards......................................................................87, 93, 118, 118 Terminals, FR10 Standalone..................................................................... 55
Overload capability................................................................................... 155 Terminals, FR11 Standalone..................................................................... 57
Terminals, FR4/FI4........................................................................................43
P Terminals, FR5................................................................................................45
Package label................................................................................................. 16 Terminals, FR6/FI6........................................................................................47
Parameter lock............................................................................................ 111 Terminals, FR7/FI7........................................................................................49
Parameter menu...........................................................................................97 Terminals, FR8/FI8........................................................................................51
Parameter set, saving............................................................................... 109 Terminals, FR9................................................................................................53
Parameter, comparing............................................................................. 110 Terminals, tightening torques...............................................................154
Parameter, downloading to drive........................................................109 Timeout time............................................................................................... 113
Parameter, editing................................................................................ 98, 98 Total counters............................................................................................. 116
Parameter, uploading to control panel............................................. 109 Trip counters................................................................................................116
Password.......................................................................................................111 Type code........................................................................................................17
Power ratings............................................................................156, 158, 160
Power ratings, North America............................................ 157, 159, 162 U
Power unit topology................................................................................... 39 UL certification.............................................................................................. 10
Pre-charge mode parameter................................................................. 116 UL requirements, cables............................................................................ 38
Principal connection diagram................................................................. 38 Up to keypad............................................................................................... 109
Product modified label...............................................................................31

V
Q
Vibration and shock.....................................................................................32
Qualified personnel..................................................................................... 10

W
R
Weight............................................................................................................130
Remote commands..................................................................................... 16
Resetting fault history.............................................................................. 104
RUN test.........................................................................................................123

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601/DPD00910 | 195

Vacon Ltd, Member of the
Danfoss Group
Runsorintie 7
FIN-65380 Vaasa
www.danfoss.com

Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogs, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This
also applies to products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All
trademarks in this material are property of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

Danfoss A/S © 2022.12 AQ275638903263en-000601 / DPD00910

*DPD00910J*